Omron VARISPEED CIMR-V7AZ20P3 User manual

Manual No.
TOEPC71060605-02-OY
VARISPEED V7
Compact Sensorless Vector Inverter
USER’S MANUAL
PREFACE
Omron Yaskawa Motion Control (from now OYMC) V7AZ is a small and
simple Inverter, as easy to use as a contactor. This instruction manual
describes installation, maintenance, inspection, troubleshooting, and specifications of the V7AZ. Read this instruction manual thoroughly before operation.
OMRON YASKAWA MOTION CONTROL
General Precautions
• Some drawings in this manual are shown with protective covers or shields
removed in order to show detail with more clarity. Make sure all covers and
shields are replaced before operating the product.
• This manual may be modified when necessary because of improvements to
the product, modifications, or changes in specifications.
Such modifications are indicated by revising the manual number.
• To order a copy of this manual, or if your copy has been damaged or lost,
contact your OMRON representative.
• OMRON YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product
made by the user, since that will void the guarantee.
1
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Read this instruction manual thoroughly before installation, operation, maintenance, or inspection of the V7AZ. In this manual, safety precautions are classified as either warnings or cautions and are indicated as shown below.
WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in
minor or moderate injury or damage to equipment.
It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices.
Even items classified as cautions may result in serious accidents in some situations. Always follow these important precautions.
NOTE
2
: Indicates information to insure proper operation.
PRECAUTIONS FOR UL/cUL MARKING
• Do not connect or disconnect wiring, or perform signal checks while the
power supply is turned ON.
• The Inverter internal capacitor is still charged even after the power supply
is turned OFF. To prevent electric shock, disconnect all power before servicing the Inverter, and then wait at least one minute after the power supply is disconnected. Confirm that all indicators are OFF before
proceeding.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the Inverter. The
Inverter is an electronic device that uses semiconductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
• Do not remove the Digital Operator or the blank cover unless the power
supply is turned OFF. Never touch the printed circuit board (PCB) while
the power supply is turned ON.
• This Inverter is not suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering more
than 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 250 V maximum (200 V Class
Inverters) or 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes, 480 V maximum (400 V
Class Inverters).
CAUTION
• Use 75°C copper wire or the equivalent.
PRECAUTIONS FOR CE MARKINGS
• Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1 and
overvoltage category II is provided with control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to conform to
CE requirements.
• For 400 V Class Inverters, make sure to ground the supply neutral to conform to CE requirements.
• For conformance to EMC directives, refer to the relevant manuals for the
requirements.
Document No. EZZ006543
3
RECEIVING THE PRODUCT
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• Do not install or operate any Inverter that is
damaged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury or
equipment damage.
18
MOUNTING
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
4
• Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving
the Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the
terminal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
23
• Mount the Inverter on nonflammable material
(i.e., metal).
Failure to observe this caution may result in a fire.
23
• When mounting Inverters in an enclosure, install
a fan or other cooling device to keep the intake
air temperature below 50 °C (122 °F) for IP20
(open chassis type), or below 40 °C (105 °F) for
NEMA 1 (TYPE 1).
Overheating may cause a fire or damage the Inverter.
23
• The V7AZ generates heat. For effective cooling,
mount it vertically.
Refer to the figure in Choosing a Location to
Mount the Inverter on page 24.
24
WIRING
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Only begin wiring after verifying that the power
supply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
28
• Wiring should be performed only by qualified
personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
28
• When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check
the wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
28
• Always ground the ground terminal
34
accord-
ing to the local grounding code.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
• For 400 V Class, make sure to ground the supply neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock or a fire.
37
• If the power supply is turned ON while the FWD
(or REV) Run Command is being given, the
motor will start automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that
the RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
37
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
112
5
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
6
• Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides
with the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal
injury or a fire.
28
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
28
• To connect a Braking Resistor, Braking Resistor
Unit, or Braking Unit, follow the procedure
described in this manual.
Improper connection may cause a fire.
34
• Always tighten terminal screws of the main circuit and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a malfunction, damage, or a fire.
28
• Never connect the AC main circuit power supply
to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, -,
+1, or +2.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
28
• Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
28
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
28
• To store a constant with an Enter Command by
communications, be sure to take measures for
an emergency stop by using the external terminals.
Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.
155
OPERATION
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• Only turn ON the input power supply after confirming that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the
Digital Operator or the covers while current is
flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
38
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP
switches with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
38
• Never touch the terminals while current is flowing, even if the Inverter is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric shock.
38
• When the fault retry function is selected, stand
clear of the Inverter or the load. The Inverter
may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
84
• When continuous operation after power recovery is selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the
load. The Inverter may restart suddenly after
stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
79
• The Digital Operator stop button can be disabled by a setting in the Inverter. Install a separate emergency stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
98
7
WARNING
(Ref. page)
• If an alarm is reset with the operation signal ON,
the Inverter will restart automatically. Reset an
alarm only after verifying that the operation signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
37
• When the 3-wire sequence is set, do not make
the wiring for the control circuit unless the multifunction input terminal parameter is set.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
112
• If n001=5, a Run Command can be received
even while changing a constant. If sending a
Run Command while changing a constant, such
as during a test run, be sure to observe all
safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
46, 53
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
8
• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be
extremely hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
38
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor
and machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
38
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
38
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety
measures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
187
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
38
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been
preset at the factory. Do not change the settings
unnecessarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.
38
9
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
WARNING
(Ref. page)
10
• Never touch high-voltage terminals on the
Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electrical shock.
192
• Disconnect all power before performing maintenance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected.
For 400 V Class Inverters, confirm that all indicators are OFF before proceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
192
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any
part of the V7AZ.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semiconductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
192
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted
to perform maintenance, inspection, or parts
replacement.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.
192
CAUTION
(Ref. page)
• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
192
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors,
or the cooling fan while power is applied to the
circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
192
OTHERS
WARNING
• Never modify the product.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electrical shock or
injury and will void the guarantee.
CAUTION
• Do not subject the Inverter to halogen gases, such as fluorine,
chlorine, bromine, and iodine, at any time even during transportation or installation.
Otherwise, the Inverter can be damaged or interior parts burnt.
11
WARNING LABEL
A warning label is provided on the front cover of the Inverter, as shown below.
Follow the warnings when handling the Inverter.
Plastic Case
Status Indicators
Nameplate
Warning Label Location
Certification Mark
Warning Labels
FPST31042-8
FPST31042-74
Example of 5.5 kW for 400 V
12
CONTENTS
NOTATION FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - - - - - - 2
1 Receiving the Product - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 18
„ Checking the Nameplate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 19
2 Identifying the Parts - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20
3 Mounting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
„ Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 23
„ Mounting Dimensions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24
„ Mounting/Removing Components- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 25
†
†
†
†
†
†
†
Removing the Front Cover- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mounting the Front Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Removing the Terminal Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mounting the Terminal Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Removing the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mounting the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Mounting the Bottom Cover - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
25
25
25
26
26
26
27
4 Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 28
„
„
„
„
Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wiring the Main Circuits- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wiring the Control Circuits - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Wiring Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
30
34
36
37
5 Operating the Inverter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 38
„ Test Run - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 39
„
„
† Selecting Rotation Direction- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - † Operation Check Points- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Operating the Digital Operator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - † Description of Status Indicators - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Function Indicator Description - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - † MNTR Multi-function Monitoring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - † Input/Output Terminal Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - † Data Reception Error Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
41
41
42
43
45
46
48
48
13
„ Simple Data Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 50
6 Programming Features - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
14
† Hardware - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
† Software (Constant) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 52
Constant Setup and Initialization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
† Constant Selection/Initialization (n001) - - - - - - - - - - - - - 53
Using V/f Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 55
† Adjusting Torque According to Application - - - - - - - - - - - 55
Using Vector Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 59
† Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application - - - - - 59
† Motor Constant Calculation- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 60
† V/f Pattern during Vector Control - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 61
Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 62
† How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
Selecting Run/Stop Commands- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
† LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 63
† REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64
† Operating (Run/Stop Commands) by Communications - - 64
Selecting Frequency Reference - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 64
† LOCAL Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
† REMOTE Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 65
Setting Operation Conditions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 66
† Autotuning Selection (n139) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 66
† Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74
† Multi-step Speed Selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 74
† Operating at Low Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75
† Adjusting Speed Setting Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 76
† Adjusting Frequency Upper and Lower Limits- - - - - - - - - 77
† Using Four Acceleration/Deceleration Times - - - - - - - - - 77
† Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081)- - - - 79
† S-curve Selection (n023) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 80
† Torque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 81
† Frequency Detection Level (n095)- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 82
† Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 84
† Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts - - 84
† Frequency Offset Selection (n146) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 85
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
† Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping - - - - - - - - - 88
† Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily - - - - - - - 89
† External Analog Monitoring(n066) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 90
† Calibrating Frequency Meter or Ammerter (n067) - - - - - 91
† Using Analog Output (AM-AC) as Pulse Train Signal - - - 91
† Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max - - - - - - - 94
† Operator Stop Key Selection (n007) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 98
† Second motor selection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 99
Selecting the Stopping Method- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 106
† Stopping Method Selection (n005) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 106
† Applying DC Injection Braking - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 107
† Simple Positioning Control when Stopping - - - - - - - - - 107
Building Interface Circuits with External Devices - - - - - - - - - 110
† Using Input Signals - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 110
† Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs - - - - - - - - - - - - 120
† Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059) - - - - - - - - - - 124
Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input - - - - - - - - - - 126
Frequency Reference by Pulse Train Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - 128
Two-wire Sequence 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 129
Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current Limit) - - - - - - - - 131
† Stall Prevention during Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 133
Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
† Slip Compensation (n002 = 0) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 135
Motor Protection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
† Motor Overload Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 136
† PTC Thermistor Input for Motor Overheat Protection - - 138
Selecting Cooling Fan Operation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 141
Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications - - - - - - - - - 141
† MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications - - - - - - - - - - 141
† Communications Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 142
† Communications Connection Terminal - - - - - - - - - - - - 142
† Setting Constants Necessary for Communication- - - - - 143
† Message Format- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 144
† Storing Constants [Enter Command] - - - - - - - - - - - - - 155
† Performing Self-test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 158
Using PID Control Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 159
† PID Control Selection (n128) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 159
15
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
† Analog Position Control with Bi-directional PID Output - 163
† Bidirectional Reference Control- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 164
Using Constant Copy Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 168
† Constant Copy Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 168
† READ Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 170
† COPY Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 172
† VERIFY Function- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 174
† Inverter Capacity Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 176
† Software No. Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 178
† Display List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 179
Customer Specific Display Scaling - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 181
Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference Loss (n064) - 183
Input/Output Open-phase Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 184
Undertorque Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 185
Using Inverter for Elevating Machines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187
† Brake ON/OFF Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 187
† Stall Prevention during Deceleration - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189
† Settings for V/f Pattern and Motor Constants - - - - - - - - 189
† Momentary Power Loss Restart and Fault Restart - - - - 189
† I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection- - 189
† Carrier Frequency - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 189
† External Baseblock Signal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
† Acceleration/Deceleration Time- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
† Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side - - - - - - - - - - - - 190
Using MECHATROLINK-II Communications - - - - - - - - - - - - 191
7 Maintenance and Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - 192
„ Periodic Inspection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 193
„ Part Replacement - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 194
†
Replacement of Cooling Fan- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 195
8 Fault Diagnosis - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 197
„ Protective and Diagnostic Functions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 197
„
16
† Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover - - - - - - - 197
† Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator - - - - 198
Troubleshooting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 212
9 Specifications - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 214
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Standard Specifications (200 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Specifications (400 V Class) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Standard Wiring - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP Transistor - - - - Dimensions/Heat Loss - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Recommended Peripheral Devices- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Constants List - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
214
218
222
226
228
231
234
10 Conformance to CE Markings - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
„ CE Markings - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
„ Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings - - - - - - - - - 247
†
†
Low Voltage Directive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 247
EMC Directive - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 248
17
1 Receiving the Product
Do not install or operate any Inverter that is dam-
CAUTION aged or has missing parts.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
or equipment damage.
After unpacking the V7AZ, check the following.
• Verify that the model number matches your purchase order or packing
slip.
• Check the Inverter for physical damage that may have occurred during
shipping.
If any part of V7AZ is missing or damaged, call for service immediately.
18
1 Receiving the Product
„ Checking the Nameplate
Example for 3-phase, 200-VAC, 0.1-kW (0.13 HP) Inverter
for European standards
Inverter Model
Input Spec.
Output Spec.
Lot No.
Serial No.
20P10
CIMR-V7AZ20P1
Mass
Software Number
Model
AZ
Applicable maximum motor output
200 V class
400 V class
0.1 kW
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
4.0 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
5.5 kW
Inverter
0P1
V7AZ Series
0P2
0P4
0P7
1P5
No.
A
Type
With Digital Operator (with potentiometer)
2P2
3P0
Note: Contact your OMRON representatives
for models without heatsinks.
4P0
5P5
7.5 kW
7P5
No.
B
2
4
No.
Z
Specifications
B
2
4
Single-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 400 VAC
0P1
0P2
0P4
0P7
1P5
2P2
3P0
4P0
5P5
7P5
Applicable maximum motor output
200 V class
400 V class
0.1 kW
0.25 kW
0.37 kW
0.55 kW
0.55 kW
1.1 kW
1.1 kW
1.5 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
2.2 kW
3.0 kW
4.0 kW
4.0 kW
5.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
7.5 kW
Voltage Class
Single-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 200 VAC
Three-phase 400 VAC
Specifications
European standards
0
Protective structure
Open chassis
(IP20, IP00)*1
1
Enclosed wall-mounted
(NEMA1)*2
No.
*1: Inverters with outputs 0P1 to 3P7 are rated
IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom
covers if using open-chassis mounted Inverters
with a 5P5 or 7P5 output.
*2: A NEMA 1 rating is optional for Inverters with
outputs 0P1 to 3P7 but standard for 5P5 or 7P5.
7.5 kW
Inverter Software Version
The inverter software version can be read out from the monitor parameter
U-10 or parameter n179. The parameter shows the last for digits of the
software number (e.g. display is“5740”for the software version VSP015740).
The manual describes the functionality of the Inverter software version
VSP015740 (0.1 to 4.0 kW) and VSP105750 (5.5 and 7.5 kW). Older software
versions do not support all described functions. Check the software version
before starting to work with this manual.
19
2 Identifying the Parts
Terminal Cover
Wiring Holes
for Control Circuit
Wiring Holes
for Main Circuit
Ground Terminal
Cooling Fan
Fan Cover
Digital Operator
(with potentiometer)
JVOP-140
Used for setting or
changing constants.
Frequency can be set
using the potentiometer.
20
Digital Operator
(without potentiometer)
JVOP-147
Used for setting or
changing constants.
Digital Operator
Front Cover
Nameplate
Heatsink
Bottom Cover
Blank cover
In models without a
Digital Operator, the
blank cover is mounted
in place of the Digital
Operator.
2 Identifying the Parts
V7AZ Inverters with the Covers Removed
Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Inverter Operation Status Indicators
Terminal Resistor Switch for
Communication Circuit
Voltage/Current Change Switch for
Analog Frequency Reference Input
Control Circuit Terminal Block
Input Polarity
Switch
Short-circuit
Bar
Main Circuit Terminal Block
Ground Terminals
Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 1.5 kW) Inverter
Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Inverter Operation Status Indicators
Terminal Resistor Switch for
Communication Circuit
Input Polarity
Switch
Voltage/Current Change Switch for
Analog Frequency Reference Input
Control Circuit Terminal Block
Short-circuit
Bar
Main Circuit Terminal Block
Ground Terminals
Example for 3-phase (200 V Class, 0.1 kW) Inverter
21
Main Circuit Terminal Arrangement
The terminal arrangement of the main circuit terminals depends on the
Inverter model.
CIMR-V7AZ20P1 to 20P7, B0P1 to B0P4
CIMR-V7AZ21P5, 22P2, B0P7, B1P5, 40P2 to 42P2
CIMR-V7AZ24P0, B2P2, 43P0, 44P0
CIMR-V7AZB4P0
CIMR-V7AZ25P5, 27P5, 45P5, 47P5
R/L1 S/L2 T/L3
22
㧙
+1
+2
B1
B2 U/T1 V/T2 W/T3
3 Mounting
3 Mounting
„ Choosing a Location to Mount the Inverter
Be sure the Inverter is protected from the following conditions.
• Extreme cold and heat. Use only within the specified ambient temperature range:
−10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F) for IP20 (open chassis type),
−10 to 40 °C (14 to 105 °F) for NEMA 1 (TYPE 1)
• Rain and moisture
• Oil sprays and splashes
• Salt spray
• Direct sunlight (Avoid using outdoors.)
• Corrosive gases (e.g., sulfurized gas) or liquids
• Dust or metallic particles in the air
• Physical shock or vibration
• Magnetic noise (Examples: Welding machines, power devices, etc.)
• High humidity
• Radioactive substances
• Combustibles, such as thinner or solvents
23
„ Mounting Dimensions
To mount the V7AZ, the dimensions shown below are required.
a
a
Air
100 mm (3.94 in.) or more
Air
100 mm (3.94 in.) or more
Voltage Class
(V)
Max. Applicable
Motor Capacity
(kW)
200 V Single-phase
3.7 kW or less
3-phase
400 V 3-phase
200 V 3-phase
400 V 3-phase
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
Length a
30 mm (1.18 in.) min.
50 mm (1.97 in.) min.
CAUTION • Lift the Inverter by the heatsinks. When moving the
Inverter, never lift it by the plastic case or the terminal cover.
Otherwise, the main unit may fall and be damaged.
• The V7AZ generates heat. For effective cooling,
mount it vertically.
24
3 Mounting
NOTE
• The same space is required horizontally and vertically and
right and left for both Open Chassis (IP00, IP20) and
Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA 1) Inverters.
• Always remove the top and bottom covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 5.5/7.5
kW in a panel.
„ Mounting/Removing Components
Removing and Mounting the Digital Operator and Covers
† Removing the Front Cover
Use a screwdriver to loosen the screw
(section A) on the front cover. (To prevent loss, this screw cannot be
removed.) Then press the right and left
sides in direction 1 and lift the front
cover in direction 2.
A
1
2
1
† Mounting the Front Cover
Mount the front cover by reversing the
order of the above procedure for
removal.
† Removing the Terminal Cover
• 200 V class Inverters with 1.1 kW
and more and all 400 V class
Inverters:
After removing the front cover,
press the right and left sides of the
terminal cover in direction 1 and lift
the terminal cover in direction 2.
25
• Inverters of 5.5 and 7.5 kW:
Use a screwdriver to loosen
the screw (section B) on the
terminal cover surface. (To
prevent loss, this screw cannot
be removed.) Then press the
right and left sides in direction
1 and lift the terminal cover in
direction 2.
B
1
2
1
† Mounting the Terminal
Cover
Mount the terminal cover by
reversing the order of the above procedure for removal.
† Removing the Digital Operator
After removing the front cover, (follow the procedure on page 25) lift the
upper and lower sides (section C) of
the right side of the Digital Operator
in direction 1.
† Mounting the Digital Operator
Mount the Digital Operator by reversing the order of the above procedure
for removal.
26
C
C
3 Mounting
† Removing the Bottom Cover
• 200 V class Inverters with 1.1 kW
and more and all 400 V class
Inverters:
After removing the front cover and
the terminal cover, tilt the bottom A
cover in direction 1 with section A
as a supporting point.
• Inverters of 5.5 and 7.5 kW
After removing the terminal cover,
use a screwdriver to loosen the
mounting screw in direction 1.
A
1
1
† Mounting the Bottom Cover
Mount the bottom cover by reversing
the order of the above procedure for
removal.
27
4 Wiring
WARNING • Only begin wiring after verifying that the power sup-
•
•
•
CAUTION
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
28
ply is turned OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
When wiring the emergency stop circuit, check the
wiring thoroughly before operation.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
For the 400 V Class, make sure to ground the supply
neutral.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock or a fire.
Verify that the Inverter rated voltage coincides with
the AC power supply voltage.
Failure to observe this caution may result in personal injury or a fire.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on the
Inverter.
Performing withstand voltage tests may damage
semiconductor elements.
Always tighten terminal screws of the main circuit
and the control circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in a malfunction, damage, or a fire.
Never connect the AC main circuit power supply to
output terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, -, +1,
or +2.
The Inverter will be damaged and the guarantee will
be voided.
Do not connect or disconnect wires or connectors
while power is applied to the circuits.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
To store a constant with an Enter Command by communications, be sure to take measures for an emergency stop by using the external terminals.
4 Wiring
Delayed response may cause injury or damage the
machine.
Wiring Instructions
NOTE
1. Always connect the power supply for the main circuit
inputs to the power input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3
(R/L1, S/L2 for single-phase power) via a molded-case
circuit breaker (MCCB) or a fuse. Never connect the
power supply to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, −,
+1, or +2. The Inverter may be damaged.
For single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and
S/L2. Never connect terminal T/L3. Fuses must be of ULclass RK5 fuse or an equivalent.
Refer to page 231 for recommended peripheral devices.
Inverter Power Supply Connection Terminals
200-V 3-phase Input
Power Supply Specification Inverters
CIMR-V7††2†††
200-V Single Input
Power Supply Specification Inverters
CIMR-V7††B†††
400-V 3-phase Input
Power Supply Specification Inverters
CIMR-V7††4†††
Connect to R/L1,
S/L2, and T/L3.
Connect to R/L1 and
S/L2.
Connect to R/L1,
S/L2, and T/L3.
2. If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long,
reduce the Inverter carrier frequency. For details, refer to
Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max on page
94.
3. Control wiring must be less than 50 m (164 ft) in length
and must be separated from power wiring. Use shielded
twisted-pair cable when inputting the frequency signal
externally.
4. Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1 and overvoltage category II is provided with
control circuit terminals. Additional insulation may be
necessary in the end product to conform to CE requirements.
5. Closed-loop connectors should be used when wiring to the
main circuit terminals.
29
6. Voltage drop should be considered when determining the
wire size.
Voltage drop can be calculated using the following equation:
Phase-to-phase voltage drop (V)
= 3 × Wire resistance (Ω/km) × Wiring distance (m) ×
Current
(A) × 10-3
Select a wire size so that voltage drop will be less than 2%
of the normal rated voltage.
7. If the Inverter is connected to a power transformer exceeding 600 kVA, excessive peak current may flow into the
input power supply circuit, and break the converter section. In this case, attach an AC reactor (optional) to the
Inverter input side, or a DC reactor (optional) to the DC
reactor connection terminal.
„ Wire and Terminal Screw Sizes
1. Control Circuits
Model
Terminal
Symbols
Screws
Tightening
Torque
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size
AWG
mm2
AWG
MA, MB, MC
M3
0.5 to 0.6
(4.44 to 5.33)
Twisted wires:
0.5 to 1.25,
Single: 0.5 to 1.25
20 to 16,
20 to 16
0.75
18
S1 to S7, P1,
P2, SC, PC,
R+, R-, S+, S-,
FS, FR, FC,
AM, AC, RP
M2
0.22 to 0.25
(1.94 to 2.21)
Twisted wires:
0.5 to 0.75,
Single: 0.5 to 1.25
20 to 18,
20 to 16
0.75
18
mm2
Same
for all
models
30
Recommended Size
Type
Shielded or
equivalent
4 Wiring
2. Main Circuits
200 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters
Model
Terminal Symbols
Screws
Tightening
Torque
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size
Recommended
Size
mm
AWG
CIMRV7ΑΖ
20P1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
20P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
20P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
20P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
21P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
3.5
12
CIMRV7ΑΖ
22P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
3.5
12
CIMRV7ΑΖ
24P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to 13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
5.5
10
CIMRV7ΑΖ
25P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8
10 to 8
8
8
CIMRV7ΑΖ
27P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, , +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8
10 to 8
8
8
2
mm
2
Type
AWG
600-V
vinylsheathed
or equivalent
Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
31
200 V Class Single-phase Input Inverters
Model
Terminal Symbols
Screws
Tightening
Torque
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size
Recommended
Size
mm2
AWG
mm
2
Type
AWG
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B0P1
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B0P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B0P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M3.5
0.8 to 1.0
(7.1 to 8.88)
0.75 to 2
18 to 14
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B0P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
3.5
12
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B1P5
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
5.5
10
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B2P2
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
5.5
10
CIMRV7ΑΖ
B4P0
R/L1, S/L2, -, +1,
+2, B1, B2, U/T1,
V/T2, W/T3
M5
3.0 (26.62)
3.5 to 8
12 to 8
8
8
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 8
14 to 8
600-V vinylsheathed or
equivalent
Note: 1. The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
2. Do not use terminal T/L3 on Inverters with single-phase input.
32
4 Wiring
400 V Class 3-phase Input Inverters
Model
Terminal Symbols
Screws
Tightening
Torque
N•m (lb•in)
Wires
Applicable Size
Recommended
Size
mm2
AWG
mm
2
CIMRV7ΑΖ
40P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
40P4
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
40P7
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
41P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
42P2
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
CIMRV7ΑΖ
43P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
2
14
3.5
12
2
14
3.5
12
CIMRV7ΑΖ
44P0
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.2 to 1.5
(10.65 to
13.31)
2 to 5.5
14 to 10
Type
AWG
CIMRV7ΑΖ
45P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M4
1.4
(12.39)
3.5 to
5.5
12 to 10
5.5
10
CIMRV7ΑΖ
47P5
R/L1, S/L2, T/L3,
-, +1, +2, B1, B2,
U/T1, V/T2, W/T3
M5
2.5
(22.13)
5.5 to 8
10 to 8
5.5
10
600-V vinylsheathed or
equivalent
Note: The wire size is given for copper wire at 75°C (160°F).
33
„ Wiring the Main Circuits
[Example of 3-phase,
400 V Class, 0.37 kW Inverters]
L1 L2 L3
MCCB or
Leakage
Breaker
Grounding
• Main Circuit Input Power Supply
Always connect the power supply line to input terminals R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3. Never connect them to terminals U/T1, V/T2, W/T3, B1, B2, −, +1, or +2. The Inverter may be damaged if the wrong terminals are connected.
For single-phase Inverters, always use terminals R/L1 and S/L2. Never connect
NOTE terminal T/L3.
• Grounding (Use ground terminal
WARNING
.)
Always ground the ground terminal
according to the
local grounding code.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an electric
shock or a fire.
Never ground the V7AZ to the same ground as welding machines, motors, or other electrical equipment.
When several V7AZ Inverters are used side by side, ground each as shown in the following
examples. Do not loop the ground wires.
Good
34
Good
Poor
4 Wiring
• Braking Resistor Connection (Optional)
connect the braking resistor, cut the protector on terminals
WARNING To
B1 and B2.
To protect the braking resistor from overheating, install a thermal overload relay between the braking resistor and the
Inverter. This provides a sequence that turns OFF the power
supply with thermal relay trip contacts.
Failure to observe this warning may result in a fire.
Use this same procedure when connecting a Braking Resistor Unit.
Refer to page 223.
• Inverter Output
Connect the motor terminals to U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.
• Wiring the Main Circuit Terminals
Pass the cables through the wiring hole to connect them. Always mount the cover in its
original position.
Connect with a Phillips screwdriver.
35
„ Wiring the Control Circuits
Only basic insulation is provided for the control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product.
• Control Circuit Terminals
Pass the cable through the wiring hole to connect it. Always mount
the cover in its original position.
Contact Output
SW1 can be changed according to sequence input signal (S1 to S7)
polarity.
0 V common: NPN side (factory setting)
+24 V common: PNP side
Refer to pages 226 and 227 for SW1.
Refer to pages 126 and 142 for SW2.
Wiring the Control Circuit Terminals
Screwdriver Blade Width
0.4 mm max
(0.016 in.)
2.5 mm max
(0.098 in.)
Insert the wire into the lower part of the terminal block and connect
it tightly with a screwdriver.
36
4 Wiring
NOTE
• Keep the screwdriver vertical to the Inverter.
• Refer to Page 30 for tightening torques.
5.5 mm
(0.22 in.)
The wire sheath strip length must be 5.5 mm (0.22 in.).
Open the front cover and verify that the strip length is 5.5 mm
(0.22 in.).
5.5mm
Scale
CONTACT OUTPUT
SW1
SW2
„ Wiring Inspection
After completing wiring, check the following.
• Wiring is proper.
• Wire clippings or screws are not left in the Inverter.
• Screws are securely tightened.
• Bare wires in the terminals do not contact other terminals.
WARNING If the power supply is turned ON while the FWD (or
REV) Run Command is given, the motor will start
automatically.
Turn the power supply ON after verifying that the
RUN signal is OFF.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
NOTE
1. If the FWD (or REV) Run Command is given when the
Run Command from the control circuit terminal is
selected (n003 = 1), the motor will start automatically
after the main circuit input power supply is turned ON.
2. To set the 3-wire sequence, set terminal S3 (n052) to 0.
37
5 Operating the Inverter
The Control Mode Selection (n002) is initially set to V/f control mode.
WARNING • Only turn ON the input power supply after confirming that the Digital Operator or blank cover
(optional) are in place. Do not remove the Digital
Operator or the covers while current is flowing.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never operate the Digital Operator or DIP switches
with wet hands.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
• Never touch the terminals while current is flowing,
even if the Inverter is stopped.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electric shock.
CAUTION
38
• Never touch the heatsinks, which can be extremely
hot.
Failure to observe this caution may result in harmful
burns to the body.
• It is easy to change operation speed from low to
high. Verify the safe working range of the motor and
machine before operation.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury
and machine damage.
• Install a holding brake separately if necessary.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
• Do not perform signal checks during operation.
The machine or the Inverter may be damaged.
• All the constants set in the Inverter have been preset
at the factory. Do not change the settings unnecessarily.
The Inverter may be damaged.
5 Operating the Inverter
„ Test Run
The Inverter operates when a frequency (speed) is set.
There are four operating modes for the V7AZ:
1. Run Command from the Digital Operator (potentiometer/digital setting)
2. Run Command from the control circuit terminals
3. Run Command from MEMOBUS communications
4. Run Command from communication card (optional)
Prior to shipping, the Inverter is set up to receive the Run Command and
frequency reference from the Operator. Below are instructions for running the V7AZ using the JVOP-147 Digital Operator (without potentiometer). For instructions on operation, refer to page 50.
Operation reference or frequency reference constants can be selected
separately as shown below.
Name
Constant
Run
Command
Selection
n003
= 0 --- Enables run, stop, and reset from Digital Operator.
= 1 --- Enables run and stop from control circuit terminals.
= 2 --- Enables MEMOBUS communications.
= 3 --- Enables communication card (optional).
Frequency
Reference
Selection
n004
= 0 --- Enables the Digital Operator’s potentiometer setting.
= 1 --- Enables Frequency Reference 1 (constant n024).
= 2 --- Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 3 --- Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 4 --- Enables a current reference (0 to 20 mA) at the control circuit
terminal.
= 5 --- Enables a pulse train reference at the control circuit terminal.
= 6 --- Enables MEMOBUS communications.
= 7 --- Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 8 --- Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) at the Digital Operator’s
circuit terminal.
= 9 --- Enables communication card (optional).
39
Operation Steps
Operator
Display
1. Turn ON the power supply.
Function
Indicators
6.00
2. Set constant n004 to 1.
1
3. Set the following constants.
n019: 15.0 (acceleration time)
n020: 5.0 (deceleration time)
15.0
5.0
4. Select forward or reverse run by pressing
or
NOTE
key.
Never select REV when reverse
run is prohibited.
(Forward)
or
Status
Indicators
FREF
RUN
ALARM
PRGM
RUN
ALARM
PRGM
RUN
ALARM
F/R
RUN
ALARM
FREF
RUN
ALARM
FOUT
RUN
ALARM
FOUT
RUN
(Reverse)
5. Set the reference by pressing
or
60.00
key.
6. Press
7. Press
NOTE
0.00→60.00
.
If the potentiometer is switched
rapidly, the motor also accelerates or decelerates rapidly in
proportion to the potentiometer
movement. Pay attention to load
status and switch the potentiometer at the speed that will not
adversely affect motor movement.
Status indicators
40
60.00→0.00
to stop.
: ON
: Flashing (Long flashing)
ALARM
: Flashing
: OFF
5 Operating the Inverter
† Selecting Rotation Direction
It is possible to select the direction in which the motor rotates when the
Forward Run Command is executed.
The motor rotates in the opposite direction when the Reverse Run Command is executed.
n040
Setting
Description
0
The motor rotates in the counterclockwise direction as
viewed from the load when the Forward Run Command is executed.
1
The motor rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from
the load when the Forward Run Command is executed.
† Operation Check Points
•
•
•
•
•
•
Motor rotates smoothly.
Motor rotates in the correct direction.
Motor does not have abnormal vibration or noise.
Acceleration and deceleration are smooth.
Motor current consumption is matching to load condition .
Status indicators and Digital Operator display are correct.
41
„ Operating the Digital Operator
All functions of the V7AZ are set using the Digital Operator. Below are
descriptions of the display and keypad sections.
JVOP-140 Digital Operator
Data Display Section
Indicator/Display Section
Function Indicators
Indicators switch to another
function each time
is pressed.
The displayed data can
be changed.
Frequency setting
potentiometer
Used to change
frequency setting.
Press to switch
between
functions.
Press to enter the
Press to increase
constant data.
Status indicator
(Displays the constant constant No./data
(same function as
value.
data when selecting a
RUN indicator)
constant No.
for the PRGM indicator.)
Press
to
decrease
Operator CN2 terminal*
constant No./data
value.
Press to run
the motor.
Press to stop the motor.
(Press to reset faults.)
(Rear side of the Operator)
CN2-3: GND for Operator circuit terminal
CN2-1: Operator circuit terminal
(voltage reference)
CN2-2: Operator circuit terminal
(current reference)
* For details, refer to Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram on page 167.
Details of Indicators (Color in parenthesis indicates the color of the indicator.)
FREF
Frequency reference
setting/monitoring
(GREEN)
F/R
Operator Run
Command FWD/REV
selection
(GREEN)
42
FOUT
Output frequency
monitoring
(GREEN)
IOUT
Output current
monitoring
(GREEN)
MNTR
Multi-function
monitoring
(GREEN)
LO/RE
LOCAL/REMOTE
Selection
(RED)
PRGM
Constant No./data
(RED)
5 Operating the Inverter
† Description of Status Indicators
There are two Inverter operation status indicators on the middle right
section of the face of the V7AZ. The combinations of these indicators
indicate the status of the Inverter (ON, flashing, and OFF). The RUN
indicator and status indicator on the
button have the same function.
:Flashing (long flashing)
:ON
RUN
ALARM
(Green)
(Red)
Operation ready
(During stop)
:Flashing
Coast to
a stop
:OFF
Normal
operation
The following table shows the relationship between the Inverter conditions and the indicator on the RUN button of the Digital Operator as
well as the RUN and ALARM indicators on the face of the V7AZ.
The indicators are lit, unlit or flashing reflecting the order of priority.
Priority
Digital
Operator
RUN
1
2
Face of
the V7AZ
RUN
Conditions
ALARM
Power supply is shut down.
Until the Inverter become ready after the power is
turned ON.
Fault
3
Emergency stop (Stop Command is sent from the
Digital Operator when the control circuit terminals
were used to operate the Inverter.)
Emergency stop (Emergency stop alarm is sent from
the control circuit terminal.)
Note: Indicators will be the same as with alarm
(stopped) occurring after the Inverter is stopped.
4
Emergency stop (Emergency stop fault is sent from
the control circuit terminal.)
Note: Indicators will be the same as with fault occurring after the Inverter is stopped.
5
6
7
Alarm (Stopped)
Alarm (Operating)
The Run Command is carried out when the External
Baseblock Command using the multi-function contact
input terminal is issued.
Stopped (during baseblock)
8
Operating (Including the status that the Inverter is operating at a frequency below the minimum output frequency.)
During dynamic braking when starting.
9
During deceleration to a stop
During dynamic braking when stopping.
43
For details on how the status indicators function for Inverter faults, refer
to Chapter 8 Fault Diagnosis. If a fault occurs, the ALARM indicator
will light.
NOTE
The fault can be reset by turning ON the Fault Reset signal
(or by pressing the
key on the Digital Operator) with
the operation signal OFF, or by turning OFF the power supply. If the operation signal is ON, the fault cannot be reset
using the Fault Reset signal.
44
5 Operating the Inverter
„ Function Indicator Description
By pressing
on the Digital Operator, each of the function indicators can be selected.
The following flowchart describes each function indicator.
Power ON
Frequency reference setting/monitoring
(Hz)
Sets V7AZ operating speed.
Output frequency monitoring (Hz)
Displays frequency that V7AZ is currently
outputting.
Setting disabled.
Output current monitoring (A)
Displays current that V7AZ is currently
outputting.
Setting disabled.
AMulti-function monitoring
46Description of the selected monitor is
displayed.
(Refer to page 48 for details.)
FWD/REV Run selection
Sets the motor rotation direction when the RUN
command is given from the Digital Operator.
Setting can be changed using the
or
key.
(forward run)
(reverse run)
If the V7AZ loses power
while in one of these
modes, it will return to
the same mode once
power is restored.
Monitor No.
U-01: Frequency reference (FREF)
U-02: Output frequency (FOUT)
U-03: Output current (IOUT)
U-04: Output voltage reference (Unit: 1V)
U-05: DC voltage (Unit: 1V)
U-06: Input terminal status
U-07: Output terminal status
U-08: Torque monitor
U-09: Fault history (Last 4 faults)
U-10: Software number
U-11: Output power
U-13: Cumulative operation time
(5.5/7.5 kW only)
U-15: Data reception error
U-16: PID feedback
U-17: PID input
U-18: PID output
U-19: Frequency reference bias
monitor (%) (for software No.
VSP010028 or later)
45
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection
This function switches the operation: operation
using the Digital Operator including frequency
setting with potentiometer, operation using the
input terminals, or operation through communications.
Setting can be changed using the
or
key.
(Local)
(Remote)
Constant No./data
Sets and changes data for a constant No.
(Refer to page 49 for details.)
If the V7AZ is stopped after
it has changed to any of
these modes during operation, it changes to Program
mode from Drive mode.
Even if the Run Command
is turned ON again, the
V7AZ does not operate.
However, if n001=5, the
Run Command can be
received and the V7AZ will
operate.
Return to
WARNING
If n001=5, a Run Command can be received even
while changing a constant. If sending a Run Command while changing a constant, such as during a test
run, be sure to observe all safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
† MNTR Multi-function Monitoring
Selecting the Monitor
Press the
key. When
is ON, data
can be displayed by selecting the monitor number.
Example: Monitoring the Output Voltage Reference
or
Select U-04 by
pressing the
or
key.
46
Output voltage reference
is displayed.
5 Operating the Inverter
Monitoring
The following items can be monitored using U constants.
Constant No.
Name
Unit
Description
U-01
Frequency Reference
(FREF)*1
Hz
Frequency reference can be monitored.
(Same as FREF)
U-02
Output Frequency
(FOUT)*1
Hz
Output frequency can be monitored.
(Same as FOUT)
U-03
Output Current (IOUT)*1
A
Output current can be monitored.
(Same as IOUT)
U-04
Output Voltage
V
Output voltage can be monitored.
U-05
DC Voltage
V
Main circuit DC voltage can be monitored.
U-06
Input Terminal Status*2
-
Input terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.
U-07
Output Terminal Status*2
-
Output terminal status of control circuit terminals can
be monitored.
U-08
Torque Monitor
%
The amount of output torque per rated torque of the
motor can be monitored. When V/f control mode is
selected, “---” is displayed.
U-09
Fault History
(Last 4 Faults)
-
The last four fault history records are displayed.
Software number can be checked.
U-10
Software No.
-
U-11
Output Power*3
kW
U-13
Cumulative
Operation Time *4
×10 H
Cumulative operation time can be monitored in units
of 10 hours.
U-15
Data Reception Error*5
-
Contents of MEMOBUS communication data reception error can be checked.
(Contents of transmission register No. 003DH are
the same.)
U-16
PID Feedback*6
%
Input 100(%)/Max. output frequency or equivalent
U-17
PID Input*6
%
±100(%)/± Max. output frequency
U-18
PID Output*6
%
±100(%)/± Max. output frequency
U-19
Frequency Reference
Bias Monitor *7
%
Bias can be monitored when Up/Down Command 2
is used.
Output power can be monitored.
* 1. The status indicator is not turned ON.
* 2. Refer to the next page for input/output terminal status.
* 3. The display range is from −99.9 to 99.99 kW.
When regenerating, the output power will be displayed in units of
0.01 kW when −9.99 kW or less and in units of 0.1 kW when more
than −9.99 kW.
47
In vector control mode, “---” will be displayed.
* 4. Applicable only for Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V
Classes).
* 5. Refer to the next page for data reception error.
* 6. Displayed in units of 0.1% when less than 100% and in units of 1% when
100% or more. The display range is from −999% to 999%.
* 7. Applicable for Inverters with software version VSP0105740(4.0kW or
less) and VSP015750(5.5kW and 7.5kW).
† Input/Output Terminal Status
Input Terminal Status
1: Terminal S1 is closed.
1: Terminal S2 is closed.
1: Terminal S3 is closed.
1: Terminal S4 is closed.
1: Terminal S5 is closed.
1: Terminal S6 is closed.
1: Terminal S7 is closed.
Not used
Output Terminal Status
1: Terminal MA-MC is closed.
1: Terminal P1-PC is closed.
1: Terminal P2-PC is closed.
Not used
† Data Reception Error Display
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used
1: Parity error
1: Over run error
1: Framing error
1: Timeover
Not used
48
5 Operating the Inverter
Fault History Display Method
When U-09 is selected, a four-digit box is displayed. The three digits
from the right show the fault description, and the digit on the left shows
the order of fault (from one to four). Number 1 represents the most
recent fault, and numbers 2, 3, 4 represent the other faults, in ascending
order of fault occurrence.
Example:
„†††yyyyyy 4-digit number
„
: Order of fault (1 to 4)
†††
: Fault description
"---" is displayed if there is no fault.
(Refer to Chapter 8 Fault Diagnosis for details.)
Switching Fault History Records
The fault that is displayed can be changed using the
or
key.
Clearing the Fault History
Set constant n001 to 6 to clear the fault history. The display will return
to n001 after 6 is set.
Note: Initializing the constants (n001=12, 13) also clears the fault history.
Setting and Referencing Constants
The following diagram shows how to select and change constants.
REMOTE/LOCAL
selection
• Setting n003 (Run Command selection)
Constant
No./
data
n003
Operation
reference
selection
Set to 1
Factory setting: 0
Operator reference Control circuit
terminal reference
(flashing when changing)
Return to
constant No.
display after
1 second
Data set
49
„ Simple Data Setting
Digital setting (refer to 5 Operating the Inverter) and potentiometer setting are both possible for simple acceleration/deceleration operation of
the V7AZ.
Digital setting is set at the factory (n004=1). For the model with JVOP140 Digital Operator (with potentiometer), factory setting is set by a frequency-setting potentiometer (n004=0).
Following is an example in which the function indicators are used to set
frequency reference, acceleration time, deceleration time, and motor
direction.
50
5 Operating the Inverter
Data Setting by Frequency-setting Potentiometer
Operation Steps
Operator
Display
1. Turn the potentiometer fully to the left.
Then, turn the power ON.
0.00
2. F/R flashes.
Select FWD/REV Run using keys.
FOR
or
REV
NOTE
Never select REV when reverse
run is prohibited.
3. Press DSPL to flash FREF. Then press
RUN.
0.00
4. Operate the motor by turning the potentiometer to the right. (Frequency reference corresponding to the
potentiometer position is displayed.)
If the potentiometer is switched
rapidly, the motor also accelerNOTE
ates or decelerates rapidly corresponding to the potentiometer
movement. Pay attention to load
status and switch the potentiometer at a speed that does not
affect motor movement.
0.00 to
60.00
Minimum
output
frequency is
1.50 Hz
Status indicators
: ON
: Flashing (Long flashing)
Function
Indicators
Status
Indicators
FREF
RUN
ALARM
F/R
RUN
ALARM
FREF
RUN
ALARM
FREF
RUN
ALARM
: Flashing
: OFF
51
6 Programming Features
Factory settings of the constants are shaded in the tables.After wiring is
complete, be sure to make the following settings before operation.
† Hardware
Make the following settings before the Inverter is turned ON.
Item
Ref.
page
Sequence input signal (S1 to S7) polarity selection
226
Voltage reference / current reference input selection of control circuit terminal FR
126
† Software (Constant)
Item
Environment
setting
Basic
characteristics
and frequency reference setting
Motor protection
Ref.
page
Constant Selection / Initialization (n001)
53
Control Mode Selection (n002)
59
Run Command Selection (n003)
63
Frequency Reference Selection (n004)
64
Stopping Method Selection (n005)
106
V/f pattern setting (n011 to n017)
55
Acceleration Time 1 (n019),
Deceleration Time 1 (n020)
77
Frequency Reference 1 to 8
(n024 to n031)
74
Motor Rated Current (n036)
136
Electric Thermal Motor Protection
Selection (n037)
136
Countermeasure
Carrier Frequency Reference (n080)
for noise and leakage current
94
Using an optional
braking resistor
134
52
Stall Prevention during Deceleration
(n092)
6 Programming Features
„ Constant Setup and Initialization
† Constant Selection/Initialization (n001)
WARNING
If n001=5, a Run Command can be received even
while changing a constant. If sending a Run Command while changing a constant, such as during a test
run, be sure to observe all safety precautions.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
The following table lists the data that can be set or read when n001 is
set. By setting this constant, the fault history can be cleared and the constants initialized. Unused constants between n001 and n179 are not displayed.
n001
Setting
Constant That Can Be Set
Constant That Can Be Referenced
0
n001
n001 to n179
1
n001 to
2
n001 to n079*1
3
n001 to n119*1
4
n001 to n179*1
5
n001 to n179*1
(Run Command can be received in Program mode.)
6
Fault history cleared
7 to 11
Not used
12
Initialize
13
Initialize (3-wire sequence)*2
n049*1
* 1. Excluding setting-disabled constants.
* 2. Refer to page 112.
NOTE
appears on the display for one second and the set data
returns to its initial values in the following cases.
1. If the set values of Multi-function Input Selections 1 to 7
53
(n050 to n056) are the same
2. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the V/f pattern setting:
Max. Output Frequency (n011) ≥ Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)
> Mid. Output Frequency
(n014)
≥ Min. Output Frequency
(n016)
Note: Mid. Output Frequency (n014) is also used for
motor 2 settings, n014 has to be lower than n140 and
n147.
For details, refer to Adjusting Torque According to Application (V/f Pattern Setting) on page 55.
3. If the following conditions are not satisfied in the jump
frequency settings:
Jump Frequency 3 (n085) ≤ Jump Frequency 2 (n084)
≤ Jump Frequency 1 (n083)
4. If the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) ≤ Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
5. If the Motor Rated Current (n036) ≤ 150% of Inverter
rated current
6. If one of the Acceleration/Deceleration Time settings
(n019 to n022) exceeds 600.0 sec. and it is tried to set
n018 to 1 (Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit 0.01 sec).
54
6 Programming Features
„ Using V/f Control Mode
V/f control mode is preset at the factory.
Control Mode Selection (n002) = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
† Adjusting Torque According to Application
Adjust motor torque by using the V/f pattern and full-range automatic
torque boost settings.
V/f Pattern Setting
Set the V/f pattern in n011 to n017 as described below. Set each pattern
when using a special motor (e.g., high-speed motor) or when requiring
special torque adjustment of the machine.
V: (Voltage)
f
(Frequency)
Constant
No.
Be sure to satisfy the following
conditions for the settings of n011 to
n017.
n016 ≤ n014 < n013 ≤ n011
If n016 = n014, the setting of n015
will be disabled.
Note: n014 is also used for motor 2
settings. (n014 < n140, n147)
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
n011
Max. Output Frequency
0.1 Hz
50.0 to 400.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
n012
Max. Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 255.0 V
(0.1 to 510.0 V)
200.0 V
(400.0 V)
n013
Max. Voltage Output Frequency (Base Frequency)
0.1 Hz
0.2 to 400.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
n014
Mid. Output Frequency
0.1 Hz
0.1 to 399.9 Hz
1.3 Hz
n015
Mid. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 255.0 V
(0.1 to 510.0 V)
12.0 V*
(24.0 V)
n016
Min. Output Frequency
0.1 Hz
0.1 to 10.0 Hz
1.3 Hz
n017
Min. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 50.0 V
(0.1 to 100.0 V)
12.0 V*
(24.0 V)
Note: The values in the parentheses are for the 400 V Class of Inverters.
55
* 10.0 V (20.0 V) for Inverters of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V
Classes).
56
6 Programming Features
Typical Setting of the V/f Pattern
Set the V/f pattern according to the application as described below. For
400-V Class Inverters, the voltage values (n012, n015, and n017)
should be doubled. When running at a frequency exceeding 50/60 Hz,
change the Maximum Output Frequency (n011).
Note: Always set the maximum output frequency according to the motor characteristics.
1. For General-purpose Applications
Motor Specification: 60 Hz
Motor Specification: 50 Hz
(Factory setting)
2. For Fans/Pumps
Motor Specification: 60 Hz
V
200
Motor Specification: 50 Hz
V
200
50
50
10
10
1.5 30
60 f
1.3 25
50 f
3. For Applications Requiring High Starting Torque
Motor Specification: 60 Hz
V
200
Motor Specification: 50 Hz
V
200
24
18
24
18
1.5 3
60 f
1.3 2.5
50 f
Increasing the voltage of the V/f pattern increases motor torque, but
an excessive increase may cause motor overexcitation, motor overheating, or vibration.
Note: Constant n012 must be set to motor rated voltage.
57
Full-range Automatic Torque Boost (when V/f Mode is
Selected: n002=0)
The motor torque requirement changes according to load conditions.
The full-range automatic torque boost adjusts the voltage of the V/f pattern according to requirements. The V7AZ automatically adjusts the
voltage during constant-speed operation, as well as during acceleration.
The required torque is calculated by the Inverter.
This ensures tripless operation and energy-saving effects.
Output voltage
Torque Compensation Gain (n103)
Required torque
Operation
V
(Voltage)
Required torque
Increase voltage
f (Frequency)
Normally, no adjustment is necessary for the Torque Compensation
Gain (n103, factory setting: 1.0). When the wiring distance between the
Inverter and the motor is long, or when the motor generates vibration,
change the automatic torque boost gain. In these cases, set the V/f pattern (n011 to n017).
Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Time Constant (n104) and the
Torque Compensation Iron Loss (n105) are normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following conditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
58
6 Programming Features
„ Using Vector Control Mode
Set the Control Mode Selection (n002) to use vector control mode.
n002 = 0: V/f control mode (factory setting)
1: Vector control mode
† Precautions for Voltage Vector Control Application
Vector control requires motor constants. The factory settings constants
have been set at the factory prior to shipment. Therefore, when a motor
designed for an Inverter is used or when a motor from any other manufacturer is driven, the required torque characteristics or speed control
characteristics may not be maintained because the constants are not suitable. Set the following constants so that they match the required motor
constants.
Constant
No.
Name
n106
Motor Rated Slip
n107
Motor Line-toneutral Resistance
n036
Motor Rated Current
n110
Motor No-load
Current
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0.1 Hz
0.0 to
20.0 Hz
*
0.001 Ω
(less than 10 Ω)
0.01 Ω
(10 Ω or more)
0.000 to
65.50 Ω
*
0.1 A
0% to 150%
of Inverter
rated current
*
1%
0% to 99%
(100% =
motor rated
current)
*
* Setting depends on Inverter capacity. (Refer to pages 245 and 246.)
Adjustment of the Torque Compensation Gain (n103) and the Torque
Compensation Time Constant (n104) is normally not required.
Adjust the torque compensation time constant under the following conditions:
• Increase the setting if the motor generates vibration.
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
Adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (n111) while driving the load so
that the target speed is reached. Increase or decrease the setting in increments of 0.1.
59
• If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain.
• If the speed is more than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain.
Adjustment of the Slip Compensation Time Constant (n112) is normally
not required. Adjust it under the following conditions:
• Reduce the setting if response is slow.
• Increase the setting if speed is unstable.
Select slip compensation status during regeneration as follows:
n113 Setting
Slip Correction during Regenerative Operation
0
Disabled
1
Enabled
† Motor Constant Calculation
An example of motor constant calculation is shown below.
1. Motor Rated Slip (n106)
120 × Motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
Number of motor poles
Motor rated speed (min-1)*2
120/Number of motor poles
2. Motor Line-to-neutral Resistance (n107)
Calculations are based on the line-to-line resistance and insulation
grade of the motor test report.
E type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×
B type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 75°C (Ω) × 0.92 ×
F type insulation: Test report of line-to-line resistance at 115°C (Ω) × 0.87 ×
3. Motor Rated Current (n036)
= Rated current at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1 (A)
4. Motor No-load Current (n110)
No-load current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
Rated current (A) at motor rated frequency (Hz)*1
100 (%)
* 1. Base frequency (Hz) during constant output control
* 2. Rated speed (rpm) at base frequency during constant output control
60
6 Programming Features
Set n106 (Motor Rated Slip), n036 (Motor Rated Current), n107 (Motor
Line-to-neutral Resistance), and n110 (Motor No-load Current) according to the motor test report.
To connect a reactor between the Inverter and the motor, set n108 to the
sum of the initial value of n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) and the
externally mounted reactor inductance. Unless a reactor is connected,
n108 (Motor Leakage Inductance) does not have to be set according to
the motor.
† V/f Pattern during Vector Control
Set the V/f pattern as follows during vector control:
The following examples are for 200 V Class motors. When using 400 V
Class motors, double the voltage settings (n012, n015, and n017).
Standard V/f
(V) [Motor Specification: 60 Hz]
(V)
[Motor Specification: 50 Hz]
(Hz)
High Starting Torque V/f
(V) [Motor Specification: 60 Hz]
(Hz)
(V)
(Hz)
[Motor Specification: 50 Hz]
(Hz)
61
When operating with a frequency larger than 60/50 Hz, change only the
Max. Output Frequency (n011).
Constant torque
Constant output or
variable output
n012
=200 V
Base point
n013
=60 or 50 Hz
n011
=90 Hz
„ Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode
The following functions can be selected by switching LOCAL or
REMOTE mode. To select the Run/Stop Command or frequency reference, change the mode in advance depending on the following applications.
• LOCAL mode: Enables the Digital Operator for Run/Stop Commands and FWD/REV Run Commands. The frequency reference can be set using the potentiometer
or
.
• REMOTE mode: Enables Run Command Selection (n003).
The frequency reference can be set using the Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
62
6 Programming Features
† How to Select LOCAL/REMOTE Mode
When LOCAL/REMOTE
switching function is not
set for multi-function
input selection
When LOCAL/REMOTE
switching function is set
for multi-function input
selection
(When 17 is not set
for any of constants
n050 to n056)
Select Lo for
operator
LO/RE selection.
Select rE for
operator
LO/RE selection.
(When 17 is set for
any of constants
n050 to n056)
Turn ON multifunction input
terminal.
LOCAL mode
Turn OFF multifunction input
terminal.
REMOTE mode
„ Selecting Run/Stop Commands
Refer to Switching LOCAL/REMOTE Mode (page 62) to select either
the LOCAL mode or REMOTE mode.
The operation method (Run/Stop Commands, FWD/REV Run Commands) can be selected using the following method.
† LOCAL Mode
When Lo (local mode) is selected for Digital Operator
ON
mode, or when the LOCAL/REMOTE switching function is set and the
input terminals are turned ON, run operation is enabled by the STOP or
on the Digital Operator, and FWD/REV is enabled by the
ON mode (using the
or
key).
63
† REMOTE Mode
1. Select REMOTE mode.
The following two methods can be used to select REMOTE mode.
• Select rE (REMOTE mode) for the
selection.
• When the LOCAL/REMOTE switching function is selected for
the multi-function input selection, turn OFF the input terminal to
select REMOTE mode.
2. Select the operation method by setting constant n003.
n003=0: Enables the Digital Operator (same with LOCAL mode).
=1: Enables the multi-function input terminal (see fig. below).
=2: Enables communications (refer to page 141).
=3: Enables communication card (optional).
• Example when using the multi-function input terminal as operation reference (two-wire sequence)
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
n003: 1 (Factory setting: 0)
n050: 1 (Factory setting)
n051: 2 (Factory setting)
• For an example of three-wire sequence, refer to page 112.
• For more information on how to select the sequence polarity, refer
to page 226.
Note: When the Inverter is operated without the Digital Operator, always set
constant n010 to 0.
n010 = 0: Detects fault contact of the Digital Operator (factory setting)
= 1: Does not detect fault contact of the Digital Operator
† Operating (Run/Stop Commands) by Communications
Setting constant n003 to 2 in REMOTE mode enables using Run/Stop
commands via MEMOBUS communications. For commands using
communications, refer to page 141.
„ Selecting Frequency Reference
Select REMOTE or LOCAL mode in advance. For the method for
selecting the mode, refer to page 63.
64
6 Programming Features
† LOCAL Mode
Select the command method using constant n008.
n008=0: Enables using the potentiometer on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables digital setting on the Digital Operator
(factory setting).
The factory setting for models with the Digital Operator
with a potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n008=0.
• Digital Setting Using the Digital Operator
Input the frequency while
is lit (press ENTER after setting the
numeric value).
Frequency reference setting is effective when 1 (factory setting: 0) is set
for constant n009 instead of pressing ENTER .
n009 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the ENTER key.
=1: Disables frequency reference setting using the ENTER key.
† REMOTE Mode
Select the command method in constant n004.
n004 =0: Enables frequency reference setting using the potentiometer
on the Digital Operator.
=1: Enables using frequency reference 1 (n024) (factory setting)
Factory setting of models with the Digital Operator with
a potentiometer (JVOP-140) is n004=0.
=2: Enables a voltage reference (0 to 10 V) (refer to the figure
on page 65).
=3: Enables a current reference (4 to 20 mA) (refer to page 126).
=4: Enables a current reference (0 to 20 mA) (refer to page 126).
=5: Enables a pulse train reference (refer to page 128).
=6: Enables communication (refer to page 141).
=7: Enables a voltage reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal CN2 (0 to 10 V)
=8: Enables a current reference on Digital Operator circuit
terminal CN2 (4 to 20 mA)
=9: Enables communication card (optional).
Example of frequency reference by voltage signal
Master
Frequency
Reference
n004=2
IM
(factory setting: 1)
(Frequency Setting Power
FS +12 V 20 mA
(0 to +10 V)
FR (Master Frequency Reference)
2 kΩ
FC (0 V)
65
„ Setting Operation Conditions
† Autotuning Selection (n139)
Motor data required for vector control can be measured and set by
inputting the data from the nameplate of the motor to be used and performing autotuning for the motor. Autotuning is possible only for motor
1.
Autotuning mode cannot be entered when motor 2 is selected
NOTE
using a Motor Switching Command allocated to a multi-function input (i.e., Autotuning Selection (n139) setting is not
possible).
Constant
No.
n139
Name
Autotuning Selection
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
−
0 to 2
0
n139 Settings
Setting
Function
0
Disabled
1
Rotational autotuning (motor 1)
2
Stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral
resistance only (motor 1)
Note: Setting is not possible when motor 2 is selected using a Motor Switching
Command allocated to a multi-function input. ("Err" will be displayed
on the Digital Operator, and the setting will return to the value before the
change.)
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning to automatically set
motor constants when using the V/f control method, when the cable
length is long, etc.
Setting the Autotuning Mode
One of the following two autotuning modes can be set.
• Rotational autotuning
• Stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only
Always confirm the precautions before autotuning.
66
6 Programming Features
• Rotational Autotuning (n139 = 1)
Rotational autotuning is used only for open-vector control. Set n139 to
1, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN key on the
Digital Operator. The Inverter will stop the motor for approximately
1 minute and then set the required motor constants automatically while
operating the motor for approximately 1 minute.
NOTE
1. When performing rotational autotuning, be sure to separate the motor from the machine and first confirm that it is
safe for the motor to rotate.
2. For a machine in which the motor itself cannot be rotated,
set the values from the motor test report.
3. If automatic rotation poses no problem, perform rotational
autotuning to ensure performance.
• Stationary Autotuning for Motor Line-to-neutral Resistance
Only (n139 = 2)
Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable
is long or the cable length has changed since installation or when the
motor and Inverter have different capacities.
Set n139 to 2 for open-loop vector control, and then press the RUN key
on the Digital Operator. The Inverter will supply power to the stationary
motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance (n107) and cable resistance will be automatically measured.
NOTE
1. Power will be supplied to the motor when stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only is performed even though the motor will not turn. Do not touch
the motor until autotuning has been completed.
2. When performing stationary autotuning for motor line-toneutral resistance only connected to a conveyor or other
machine, ensure that the holding brake is not activated
during autotuning.
Precautions before Using Autotuning
Read the following precautions before using autotuning.
• Autotuning the Inverter is fundamentally different from autotuning
the servo system. Inverter autotuning automatically adjusts parameters according to detected motor constants, whereas servo system
autotuning adjusts parameters according to the detected size of the
load.
67
• When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the
rated speed or higher), use a motor with a rated voltage that is 20 V
less than the input power supply voltage of the Inverter for 200Vclass Inverters and 40 V less for 400V-class Inverters. If the rated
voltage of the motor is the same as the input power supply voltage,
the voltage output from the Inverter will be unstable at high speeds
and sufficient performance will not be possible.
• Use stationary autotuning for motor line-to-neutral resistance only
whenever performing autotuning for a motor that is connected to a
load. (To ensure performance, set the value from the motor test
report.)
• Use rotational autotuning if performing autotuning is possible while
not connected to a load.
• If rotational autotuning is performed for a motor connected to a load,
the motor constants will not be found accurately and the motor may
exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autotuning for
a motor connected to a load.
• The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs
will be as shown in the following table during autotuning. When performing autotuning with the motor connected to a load, be sure that
the holding brake is not applied during autotuning, especially for
conveyor systems or similar equipment.
Tuning Mode
Multi-function Inputs
Multi-function Outputs
Rotational autotuning
Do not function.
Same as during normal operation
Stationary autotuning
for motor line-to-neutral resistance only
Do not function.
Maintain same status
as when autotuning is
started.
DSPL
PRGM
• To cancel autotuning, always use the STOP key on the Digital
Operator.
Precautions for Using Autotuning(when motor voltage > supply
voltage)
Use the following procedure to perform autotuning if using a motor with a rated voltage
higher than the Inverter input power supply.
1. Input the rated voltage from the motor nameplate for the Maximum Voltage (n012).
2. Set the Maximum Voltage Output Frequency (n013) to the base frequency on the
motor nameplate.
3. Perform autotuning.
4. Record the Motor No-load Current (n110).
68
6 Programming Features
5. Calculate the rated secondary current of the motor using the following equation:
Rated Secondary Current =
2
( Rated Current ) – ( No-Load Current )
2
6. Input the power supply voltage for the Maximum Voltage (n012).
7. Input the following calculated value for the Maximum Voltage Output
Frequency (n013):
Maximum Voltage Output Frequency =
Base
Frequency on the Motor Nameplate × Power Supply Voltage-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rated Voltage on the Motor Namplate
8. Perform autotuning again.
9. Record the Motor No-load Current (n110) again.
10. Calculate the rated secondary current of the motor using the following equation:
Rated Secondary Current =
Rated
Secondary Current calculated in Step 5 × Rated Voltage on Motor Nameplate
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Power Supply Voltage
11. Input the following calculated value for the Motor Rated Slip (n106):
Motor Rated Slip =
of Poles-⎞
⎛ Base Freq. from Motor Nameplate – Rated Speed from Motor Nameplate × Number
--------------------------------------⎝
⎠
120
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------No-Load Current in Step 4
No-Load Current in Step 9 × ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rated Secondary Current in Step 5
NOTE
1. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated
speed or higher), set n012 (Max. Voltage) to the input power supply
voltage × 0.9.
2. When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the
output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced.
Be sure to provide sufficient margin in the Inverter current.
Operating Procedure
1. Confirm the following:
•
•
•
•
The motor is separated from the machine system.
The motor shaft lock key is removed.
If there is a brake, it is released.
The wiring is correct.
2. The Inverter power supply is ON.
3. There is no error.
4. Select Program Mode by pressing
until
is lit.
5. Set the following constants for the selected motor to the nameplate
69
values.
Constant
No.
Name
Setting
Range
Remarks
n012
Maximum Voltage
0.1 to
255.0
Set to the rated voltage from
the nameplate.
n013
Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
0.2 to
400.0
Set to the base frequency from
the nameplate.
n036
Motor Rated Current
0.0 to
999.9
Set to the rated current from
the nameplate.
n106
Motor Rated Slip
0.0 to
20.0 Hz
Set to the value of the following
equation using data from the
nameplate:
Base frequency − Rated speed
× Number of poles / 120
When performing precision setting (i.e., when performing autotuning using a motor test report or design data), the input data to set
when autotuning will differ. Refer to the table below.
Name
Simple Setting
Precision Setting
Maximum Voltage
Motor rated voltage
Voltage under no-load conditions at motor rated speed
Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
Motor base frequency
Frequency under no-load
conditions at rated speed
Motor Rated Slip
Base frequency − Rated
speed × Number of poles /
120
Slip at rated torque
6. Set the Autotuning Selection (n139).
7. Press the DSPL key to select the autotuning mode.
• The Digital Operator will display "TUn†." The † shows the
autotuning method selected for n139.
• All function indicators will turn OFF.
• The status indicators will return to operation ready status.
• Only the
, DSPL , and STOP keys will be accepted in
autotuning mode.
• Autotuning will start when the
key is input.
• Autotuning will be cancelled when the STOP key is input
70
6 Programming Features
• When the DSPL key is input, status will return again to Program
Mode, and constants can be changed.
8. Press the
key to perform autotuning. Power will be supplied
to the motor with the selected autotuning method.
• "TUn†" will flash during autotuning.
• All function indicators will turn OFF.
• The status indicators will change to normal operation status.
9. Tuning Completed
• When autotuning has been completed properly, "End" will be displayed and constants will be changed according to the tuning
results.
• When rotational autotuning is completed, the Middle Output Frequency Voltage and Minimum Output Frequency Voltage will be
calculated and set according to the selected Maximum Voltage as
shown in the following table.
Constant
No.
Name
Setting
Range
Remarks
n015
Middle Output Frequency Voltage
0.1 to
255.0
(Factory-set Middle Output Frequency Voltage) × (Maximum
Voltage set value) / (Factoryset Maximum Voltage)
n017
Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
0.1 to
50.0
(Factory-set Minimum Output
Frequency Voltage) × (Maximum Voltage set value) / (Factory-set Maximum Voltage)
10.Press the DSPL key to select the Drive Mode. This completes autotuning.
Error Processing during Autotuning
• Errors and alarms that occur during normal operation are also
detected during autotuning.
• If an error or alarm occurs, the motor will coast to a stop (baseblock)
and autotuning will be cancelled.
71
• If an error in measurement occurs or the STOP key has been pressed
during autotuning, an EXX error will be displayed, the motor will
coast to a stop, and autotuning will be cancelled. This error message,
however, does not remain in the error log. Refer to page 211 for
information on errors.
• If autotuning is cancelled, constants changed by autotuning will automatically return to their values before the start of autotuning.
• If an error occurs while decelerating to a stop at the end of autotuning, an error will be displayed on the Digital Operator, but autotuning
processing will not be cancelled. The results of autotuning will be
valid.
Precautions after Using Autotuning
For a fixed output region, the V/f pattern for the maximum point in the
output region must be set after completing autotuning. To increase the
motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times or when using a fixed output
motor, make the following changes after autotuning. Do not change
n012 (Max. Voltage) or n013 (Max. Voltage Output Frequency).
• Increasing the Motor’s Rated Speed by 1 to 1.2 Times
To increase the motor’s rated speed by 1 to 1.2 times, use the following
formula to change the setting of Max. Output Frequency (n011):
Max. output frequency = (motor rated speed) x (no. of motor poles)/120
(Hz) x 1 to 1.2)
If the motor’s speed is increased beyond the rated speed, fixed output
characteristics will be used at high speeds and motor torque will be
reduced.
• Applications to Constant Output Motors Such as Motors for
Machine Tools
Use the following formula to change the settings of n011 (Max. Output
Frequency) when using a motor with a fixed output, e.g., a motor for a
machine tool:
n011 = Frequency (Hz) at maximum speed under no-load conditions
(load rate = 0)
Do not change the motor constants after performing autotuning.
72
6 Programming Features
Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning
Function indicators on the Digital Operator change during autotuning as
in the following diagram.
Function
Indicators
Set constants required for autotuning.
PRGM
• Maximum Voltage
• Maximum Voltage Frequency
• Motor Rated Current
• Motor Rated Slip
Lit
Set Autotuning Selection.
• Rotational / Resistance-only
stationary
DSPL
DSPL
Digital Operator
Display
Digital Operator Display
Autotuning mode
(Waiting for RUN input
TUn†
• Set constants for tuning.
STOP
E03
Lit
Lit
RESET
because
STOP Cancelled
of STOP key
Digital Operator
Display
RUN
Digital Operator Display
TUn†
Flashing
STOP
E12
Lit
Resistance tuning
• DC voltage (20%, 40%, 60%)
applied.
Resistance-only
stationary
Rotational
No-load Current Tuning
• Acceleration
• Tuning
• Deceleration
Digital Operator
Display
E04
Lit
Lit
E05
End
Cancelled because of no-load
current error.
Digital Operator
Display
XXX
Lit
Cancelled because of
acceleration error.
Digital Operator
Display
Lit
Digital OperaAutotuning completed.
tor Display
Cancelled because of
resistance error.
Digital Operator
Display
E09
• Return constants set for tuning to their
original values.
• Write tuned constants.
Cancelled because of current
detection error.
Lit
Cancelled because of
normally detected error.
DSPL
Function
Indicators
FREF
Frequency reference setting /
monitor
Lit
73
† Reverse Run Prohibit (n006)
The Reverse Run Prohibit setting disables accepting a Reverse Run
Command from the control circuit terminal or Digital Operator. This
setting is used for applications where a Reverse Run Command can
cause problems.
Setting
Description
0
Reverse run enabled.
1
Reverse run disabled.
† Multi-step Speed Selection
Up to 17 speed steps (including Jog frequency reference) can be set
using the following combinations of frequency reference and input terminal selections.
8-step speed change
n003=1 (Operation mode selection)
n004=1 (Frequency reference selection)
n024=25.0 Hz (Frequency reference 1)
n025=30.0 Hz (Frequency reference 2)
n026=35.0 Hz (Frequency reference 3)
n027=40.0 Hz (Frequency reference 4)
n028=45.0 Hz (Frequency reference 5)
n029=50.0 Hz (Frequency reference 6)
n030=55.0 Hz (Frequency reference 7)
n031=60.0 Hz (Frequency reference 8)
* For more information on how to
select the sequence voltage and the
current input, refer to page 226.
NOTE
74
When all multi-function
reference inputs are OFF, the
frequency reference selected
by constant n004 (Frequency
Reference Selection) becomes
effective.
n054=6 (Multi-function contact input terminal S5)
n055=7 (Multi-function contact input terminal S6)
n056=8 (Multi-function contact input terminal S7)
n053=1
FWD
Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Multi-step
Speed Ref 1
Multi-step
Speed Ref 2
Multi-step
Speed Ref 3
External Fault
Fault Reset
S1
S2
S5
S6
S7
S3
S4
SC
6 Programming Features
Frequency
reference
(n031) 60.0 Hz
(n030) 55.0 Hz
(n029) 50.0 Hz
(n028) 45.0 Hz
(n027) 40.0 Hz
(n026) 35.0 Hz
(n025) 30.0 Hz
(n024) 25.0 Hz
Time
FWD (REV) Run/Stop
Multi-step speed ref. 1
(terminal S5)
Multi-step speed ref. 2
(terminal S6)
Multi-step speed ref. 3
(terminal S7)
n050 = 1 (Input terminal S1) (factory setting)
n051 = 2 (Input terminal S2) (factory setting)
n052 = 3 (Input terminal S3) (factory setting)
n053 = 5 (Input terminal S4) (factory setting)
n054 = 6 (Input terminal S5) (factory setting)
n055 = 7 (Input terminal S6) (factory setting)
n056 = 8 (Input terminal S7) (Change the setting to 8.)
16-step speed operation
Set frequency references 9 to 16 for n120 to n127.
Set the input terminal for a multi-step speed reference using the multifunction input selection.
† Operating at Low Speed
By inputting a Jog Command and then a Forward (Reverse) Run Command, operation is enabled at the jog frequency set in n032. When
multi-step speed references 1, 2, 3 or 4 are input simultaneously with
the Jog Command, the Jog Command has priority.
Constant No.
Name
n032
Jog Frequency
Factory setting: 6.00 Hz
Setting
n050 to n056
Jog References
Set to 10 for any constant.
75
† Adjusting Speed Setting Signal
The relationship between the analog inputs and the frequency reference
can be set to provide the frequency reference as analog inputs to control
circuit terminal FR or FC.
Frequency Reference
Max. Output Frequency X GAIN
100
Max. Output Frequency X BIAS
100
0V
(4 mA)
(0 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
(20 mA)
( ) indicates the value when a current
reference input is selected
1. Analog Frequency Reference Gain (n060)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 10 V (or
20 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 100%
2. Analog Frequency Reference Bias (n061)
The frequency reference provided when the analog input is 0 V
(4 mA or 0 mA) can be set in units of 1%. (Max. Output Frequency
n011=100%)
* Factory setting: 0%
Typical Settings
• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 0% to 100%
at an input voltage of 0 to 5 V
Max. frequency (100%)
Gain n060 = 200
Bias n061 = 0
76
6 Programming Features
• To operate the Inverter with a frequency reference of 50% to
100% at an input voltage of 0 to 10 V
Max. frequency (100%)
0V
10 V
Gain n060 = 100
Bias n061 = 50
† Adjusting Frequency Upper and Lower Limits
Frequency
Upper Limit
(n033)
Internal
frequency
reference
Frequency
Lower Limit
(n034)
Set frequency reference
• Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)
Sets the upper limit of the frequency reference in units of 1%.
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
Factory setting: 100%
• Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034)
Sets the lower limit of the frequency reference in units of 1%.
(n011: Max. Output Frequency = 100%)
When operating at a frequency reference of 0, operation is continued
at the frequency reference lower limit.
However, if the frequency reference lower limit is set to less than the
Minimum Output Frequency (n016), operation is not performed.
Factory setting: 0%
† Using Four Acceleration/Deceleration Times
Output
Frequency
Decel Decel
Time 2 Time 1 Accel
(n022) (n020) Time 4
(n043)
Accel
Time 3
(n041)
Accel
Time 2
(n021)
Accel
Time 1
(n019)
Decel
Time 4*
(n044)
Decel
Time 3*
(n042)
Time
Forward (Reverse)
Run Command
Multi-Step
Speed Reference
Accel/Decel
Time Selection 1
Accel/Decel
Time Selection 2
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
* When deceleration to a stop is selected (n005 = 0).
77
By setting a multi-function input selection (any one of n050 to n056) to
11 (acceleration/deceleration time selection 1) or 27 (acceleration/
deceleration time selection 2), the acceleration/deceleration time is
selected by ON/OFF combinations of acceleration/deceleration time
selection 1 and acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (terminals S1
to S7).
The combinations of acceleration/deceleration time selection settings
are shown below.
Accleration/
Accleration/
Acceleration Time
Deceleration
Deceleration
Time Selection 1 Time Selection 2
Deceleration Time
OFF
OFF
Acceleration time 1 Deceleration time 1
(n019)
(n020)
ON
OFF
Acceleration time 2 Deceleration time 2
(n021)
(n022)
OFF
ON
Acceleration time 3 Deceleration time 3
(n041)
(n042)
ON
ON
Acceleration time 4 Deceleration time 4
(n043)
(n044)
No.
Name
Unit
n019
Acceleration Time 1
n020
Deceleration Time 1
n021
Acceleration Time 2
Depends on
n018 setting.
(See the next
table.)
n022
Deceleration Time 2
10.0 s
n041
Acceleration Time 3
10.0 s
n042
Deceleration Time 3
10.0 s
n043
Acceleration Time 4
10.0 s
n044
Deceleration Time 4
10.0 s
78
Setting Range Factory
Setting
Depends on
n018 setting.
(See the next
table.)
10.0 s
10.0 s
10.0 s
6 Programming Features
n018 Settings
No.
n018
Unit
Setting Range
0
0.1 s
1
0.01 s 0.00 to 99.99 s (99.99 s or less)
1s
0.1 s
0.0 to 999.9 s (999.9 s or less)
1000 to 6000 s (1000 s or more)
100.0 to 600.0 s (100 s or more)
Note: Constant n018 can be set while stopped.
If a value exceeding 600.0 s is set for the acceleration/deceleration time
when n018=0 (in units of 0.1 s), 1 cannot be set for n018.
• Acceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 100% from 0%.
• Deceleration time
Set the time needed for the output frequency to reach 0% from 100%.
(Max. Output Frequency n011 = 100%)
† Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method (n081)
WARNING When continuous operation after power recovery is
selected, stand clear of the Inverter or the load. The
Inverter may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
When constant n081 is set to 1 or 2, operation automatically restarts
even if a momentary power loss occurs.
Setting*3
Description
0
Continuous operation after momentary power
loss not enabled.
1*1
Continuous operation after power recovery
within momentary power loss ridethrough time
0.5 s
2*1, *2
Continuous operation after power recovery
(Fault output not produced.)
79
* 1. Hold the operation signal to continue operation after recovery from a
momentary power loss.
* 2. When 2 is selected, the Inverter restarts if power supply voltage recovers
while the control power supply is held.
No fault signal is output.
† S-curve Selection (n023)
To prevent shock when starting and stopping the machine, acceleration/
deceleration can be performed using an S-curve pattern.
Setting
S-curve Selection
0
S-curve characteristic not provided.
1
0.2 s
2
0.5 s
3
1.0 s
Note: 1. S-curve characteristics are not supported for simple positioning control, so use a set value of 0.
2. The S-curve characteristic time is the time from acceleration/deceleration rate 0 to the normal acceleration/deceleration rate determined by
the set acceleration/deceleration time.
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency
Output
Frequency
Time
S-curve Characteristic Time (Ts)
The following time chart shows switching between FWD/REV run
when decelerating to a stop.
Forward Run Command
Reverse Run Command
Acceleration
Deceleration
Min. Output Frequency
Output Frequency
n016
Min. Output
Frequency n016
Acceleration
S-curve Characteristics in
80
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
n090
Deceleration
6 Programming Features
† Torque Detection
If an excessive load is applied to the machine, an increase in the output
current can be detected to output an alarm signal to multi-function output terminal MA, MB, P1, or P2.
To output an overtorque detection signal, set one of the output terminal
function selections n057 to n059 for overtorque detection (Setting: 6
(NO contact) or 7 (NC contact)).
Motor Current
Time
Multi-function Output Signal
(Overtorque Detection Signal)
Terminal MA, MB, P1, or P2
* The overtorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5% of
the Inverter rated current.
Overtorque Detection Function Selection 1 (n096)
Setting
Description
0
Overtorque detection not provided.
1
Detected during constant-speed running. Operation continues after detection.
2
Detected during constant-speed running. Operation stops during detection.
3
Detected during running. Operation continues
after detection.
4
Detected during running. Operation stops during detection.
1. To detect overtorque during acceleration/deceleration, set n096 to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after overtorque detection, set n096 to 1 or 3.
During detection, the Digital Operator will display an
alarm
(flashing).
3. To stop the Inverter and generate a fault at overtorque detection, set n096
81
to 2 or 4. At detection, the Digital Operator will display an
(ON).
fault
Overtorque Detection Level (n098)
Set the overtorque detection current level in units of 1%. (Inverter rated
current = 100%) When detection by torque is selected, the motor rated
torque becomes 100%.
Factory setting: 160%
Overtorque Detection Time (n099)
If the time that the motor current exceeds the Overtorque Detection
Level (n098) is longer than Overtorque Detection Time (n099), the
overtorque detection function will operate.
Factory setting: 0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, overtorque/undertorque detection can be performed either by detecting the output current or the output torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the setting of n097 is invalid, and
overtorque/undertorque is detected by the output current.
Setting
Description
0
Detected by output torque
1
Detected by output current
† Frequency Detection Level (n095)
Effective when one or more of the Multi-function Output Selections
n057, n058 and n059 are set for frequency detection (setting: 4 or 5).
Frequency detection turns ON when the output frequency is higher or
lower than the setting for the Frequency Detection Level (n095).
Frequency Detection 1
Output frequency ≥ Frequency Detection Level n095
82
6 Programming Features
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 4.)
Frequency Detection
Level [Hz] (n095)
Release
Width
−2Hz
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Detection
Signal
Frequency Detection 2
Output frequency ≤ Frequency Detection Level n095
(Set n057, n058 or n059 to 5.)
Release
Width
+2Hz
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Detection
Level (Hz)
(n095)
Frequency
Detection
Signal
83
† Jump Frequencies (n083 to n086)
This function allows the prohibition or “jumping” of critical frequencies
so that the motor can operate without resonance caused by the machine
system. This function is also used for dead band control. Setting the values to 0.00 Hz disables this function.
Set prohibited frequencies 1, 2, and 3 as follows:
Output Frequency
Frequency Reference
n083 ≥ n084 ≥ n085
If this condition is not satisfied,
the Inverter will display
for
one second and restore the
data to initial settings.
Operation is prohibited within the jump frequency ranges.
However, the motor will operate without jumping during acceleration/
deceleration.
† Continuing Operation Using Automatic Retry Attempts (n082)
WARNING When the fault retry function is selected, stand clear of
the Inverter or the load. The Inverter may restart suddenly after stopping.
(Construct the system to ensure safety, even if the
Inverter should restart.) Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
The Inverter can be set to restart and reset fault detection after a fault
occurs. The number of self-diagnosis and retry attempts can be set to up
to 10 in n082. The Inverter will automatically restart after the following
faults occur:
OC (overcurrent)
OV (overvoltage)
The number of retry attempts is cleared to 0 in the following cases:
1. If no other fault occurs within 10 minutes after retry
2. When the Fault Reset signal is ON after the fault is detected
3. When the power supply is turned OFF
84
6 Programming Features
† Frequency Offset Selection (n146)
An offset frequency (which can be set with a constant) can be added to
or subtracted from the frequency reference using multi-function inputs.
Constant
No.
Name
n083
Jump Frequency 1
(Offset Frequency 1)
Description
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
Factory
Setting
0.00 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maximum Output Frequency)
n084
Jump Frequency 2
(Offset Frequency 2)
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
0.00 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maximum Output Frequency)
n085
Jump Frequency 3
(Offset Frequency 3)
1st digit of n146 is 0 or 1:
Setting unit: 0.01 Hz
Setting range: 0.00 to
400.0 Hz
0.00 Hz
1st digit of n146 is 2:
Setting unit: 0.01%
Setting range: 0.00% to
100.0% (Percentage of Maximum Output Frequency)
85
Constant
No.
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n146
Frequency Offset Selection
n146 is separated in 2 digits
(n146=xy). The first digit “x”
selects the use of parameters n083 to n085:
n146= 0y:
Disabled (n083 to n085 are
jump frequencies)
n146= 1y:
Enabled (n083 to n085 are
offset frequencies in Hz)
n146= 2y:
Enabled (n083 to n085 are
offset frequencies in percent)
0
The 2nd digit “y” selects the
sign of the offset frequencies. Refer to the table below
for the possible combinations:
y
n083
n084
n085
0
+
+
+
1
−
+
+
2
+
−
+
3
−
−
+
4
+
+
−
5
−
+
−
6
+
−
−
7
−
−
−
8
−
−
−
9
−
−
−
Note: When the 2nd digit of
n146 is changed, the
set values of n083 to
n085 will be initialized
to 0.
• If the 1st digit “x” of Frequency Offset Selection (n146) is 0 (frequency offsets disabled), the set values of constants n083 to n085
will function as jump frequencies.
86
6 Programming Features
• If the 1st digit “x” of Frequency Offset Selection (n146) is 1 or 2 (frequency offsets enabled), the set values of constants n083 to n085 will
function as frequency offsets.
• In order to activate the offset frequencies 1 to 3 of the Multi-function
Input Selections (n050 to n056) must be programmed to 30, 31 or 33.
Depending on the input status following combinations of the offset
frequencies can be used. Note that the sign specified with “y” is used.
Terminal Input Status
Final Offset Amount
Offset
Frequency
Input 3
Offset
Frequency
Input 2
Offset
Frequency
Input 1
OFF
OFF
OFF
None
OFF
OFF
ON
n083
OFF
ON
OFF
n084
OFF
ON
ON
n083 + n084
ON
OFF
OFF
n085
ON
OFF
ON
n083 + n085
ON
ON
OFF
n084 + n085
ON
ON
ON
n083 + n084 + n085
• The enabled offset amount can be monitored on the display of U-12
on the Digital Operator.
Monitor No.
U-12
Name
Offset amount
Description
1st digit “x”of n146 = 0: "----" displayed
1st digit “x” of n146 = 1: Display range: −400
to 400.0 Hz
1st digit “x” of n146 = 2: Display range: −
100% to 100.0%
87
The following block diagram illustrates the Frequency Offset Function.
Frequency
Reference
Upper Limit
n146,
right digit
Selected
Frequency
Reference
Jump Frequencies
0
n034 x n011
n033 x n011
0
Frequency
Reference
Lower Limit
0
n083
n084
400 Hz
Frequency
Reference
(U-01)
n085
0
n146,
right digit
Frequency Offset
Input 1
n083
Frequency Offset
Input 2
n084
Offset
Volume
(U-12)
Frequency Offset
Input 3
n085
† Operating a Coasting Motor without Tripping
To operate a coasting motor without tripping, use the Speed Search
Command or DC Injection Braking at Startup.
Speed Search Command
Restarts a coasting motor without stopping it. This function enables
smooth switching between motor commercial power supply operation
and Inverter operation.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 14 (Search Command from maximum output frequency) or 15 (Search Command from
set frequency).
Build a sequence so that a FWD (REV) Run Command is input at the
same time as the Search Command or after the Search Command. If the
Run Command is input before the Search Command, the Search Command will be disabled.
88
6 Programming Features
Time Chart at Search Command Input
FWD (REV) Run Command
0.5 s Min.
Search Command
Max. Output Frequency or
Frequency Reference at
Run Command Input
Speed Agreement
Detection
Output Frequency
Min. Baseblock
Time (0.5 s)
Speed
Search
Operation
The deceleration time for speed search operation can be set in n101.
If the setting is 0, however, an initial value of 2.0 s will be used.
The speed search starts when the Inverter’s output current is greater
than or equal to the speed search operation level (n102).
DC Injection Braking at Startup (n089, n091)
Restarts a coasting motor after stopping it. Set the DC injection braking
time at startup in n091 in units of 0.1 s. Set the DC Injection Braking
Current in n089 in units of 1% (Inverter rated current =100%). When
the setting of n091 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed and
acceleration starts from the minimum output frequency.
When n089 is set to 0, acceleration starts
from the minimum output frequency after Min. Output
Frequency
baseblocking for the time set in n091.
n016
n091
DC Injection Braking
Time at Startup
† Holding Acceleration/Deceleration Temporarily
To hold acceleration or deceleration, input an Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command. The output frequency is maintained when an
Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command is input during acceleration
or deceleration.
When the Stop Command is input while an Acceleration/Deceleration
Hold Command is being input, the acceleration/deceleration hold is
released and operation coasts to a stop.
Set a Multi-function Input Selection (n050 to n056) to 16 (acceleration/
deceleration hold).
89
Time Chart for Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command
Input
FWD (REV)
Run Command
Acceleration/
Deceleration
Hold Command
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency
Frequency
Agree
Signal
Note: If a FWD (REV) Run Command is input at the same time as an Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command, the motor will not operate. However, if the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) is set to a value
greater than or equal to the Min. Output Frequency (n016), the motor
will operate at the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034).
† External Analog Monitoring(n066)
Selects to output either output frequency or output current to analog output terminals AM-AC for monitoring.
Setting
0
Description
Output frequency
1
Output current
2
Main circuit DC voltage
3
Torque monitor
4
Output power
5
Output voltage reference
6
Frequency reference monitor
7
PID Feedback Amount (10 V/Maximum Output Frequency in n011)
8
Data Output via Communications
(MEMOBUS register No.0007H)
(10 V/1000)
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 0 (analog monitor output).
90
6 Programming Features
In factory setting, analog voltage of approx. 10 V is output when output
frequency (output current) is 100 %.
Output Frequency
(Output Current)
Frequency
Meter
AM
100 %
FM
Analog monitor gain
can be set by n067.
AC
0
10 V
Analog Output
† Calibrating Frequency Meter or Ammerter (n067)
Used to adjust analog output gain.
Frequency Meter/Ammeter
(3 V 1 mA Full-scale)
Output Frequency
(Output Current)
n067 = 0.30
100 %
AM
n067
n067 = 1.00
Factory Setting
FM
AC
0
3V
10 V
Analog Output
Set the analog output voltage at 100 % of output frequency (output current). Frequency meter displays 0 to 60 Hz at 0 to 3 V.
10 V ×
n067 setting
Output frequency becomes
=3V
0.30
100 % at this value.
† Using Analog Output (AM-AC) as a Pulse Train Signal
Output (n065)
Analog output AM-AC can be used as a pulse train output (output frequency monitor, frequency reference monitor).
Set n065 to 1 when using pulse train output.
Constant No.
Name
Unit
n065
Monitor Output Type
-
Setting Factory setting
range
0, 1
0
91
n065 Setting
n065 Setting
Description
0
Analog monitor output
1
Pulse monitor output
(Output frequency monitor)
Pulse train signal can be selected by setting in n150.
n150 Setting
0
1
Description
Output
frequency
monitor
1440 Hz/Max. frequency (n011)
1F: Output frequency × 1
6
6F: Output frequency × 6
12
12F: Output frequency × 12
24
24F: Output frequency × 24
36F: Output frequency × 36
36
40
41
Frequency
reference
monitor
1440 Hz/Max. frequency (n011)
1F: Output frequency × 1
42
6F: Output frequency × 6
43
12F: Output frequency × 12
44
24F: Output frequency × 24
45
50
36F: Output frequency × 36
Data Output
0 to 14,400 Hz output (MEMOvia Communi- BUS register No.000AH) (1 Hz/
cations
1)
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 1 (pulse monitor output).
92
6 Programming Features
At the factory setting, the pulse of 1440 Hz can be output when output
frequency is 100 %.
Output Frequency
100 %
AM
Pulse
AC (0 V)
1440 Hz
Pulse Monitor Output
NOTE
Peripheral devices must be connected according to the following load conditions when using pulse monitor output.
The machine might be damaged when the conditions are not
satisfied.
Used as a Sourcing Output
Output Voltage
VRL (V)
Load Impedance
(kΩ)
+5 V
1.5 kΩ or more
+8 V
3.5 kΩ or more
+10 V
Load
Impedance
AM
VRL
AC (0 V)
10 kΩ or more
Used as a Sinking Input
External Power
Supply (V)
+12 VDC ±5 %
or less
Sinking Current
(mA)
16 mA or less
External Power Supply
AM
Sink Current
Load
Impedance
AC (0 V)
(0 V)
93
† Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max
Set the Inverter output transistor switching frequency (carrier frequency).
Setting
Carrier Frequency (kHz)
7
12 fout (Hz)
8
24 fout (Hz)
9
36 fout (Hz)
1
2.5 (kHz)
2
5.0 (kHz)
3
7.5 (kHz)
4
10.0 (kHz)
12
14 (kHz)
Metallic
Noise from
Motor
Noise and
Current
Leakage
Higher
Smaller
Not
audible
Larger
Note: When the carrier frequency has been set to 14 kHz, use a MEMOBUS
baud rate of 4,800 bps or lower.
94
6 Programming Features
If the set value is 7, 8, or 9, the carrier frequency will be multiplied by
the same factor as the output frequency.
fc=Carrier Frequency
n080=7
2.5 kHz
fc=12 fout
1.0 kHz
83.3 Hz
n080=8
208.3 Hz
fout=Output Frequency
fc=Carrier Frequency
2.5 kHz
fc=24 fout
1.0 kHz
41.6 Hz
n080=9
104.1 Hz
fout=Output Frequency
fc=Carrier Frequency
2.5 kHz
fc=36 fout
1.0 kHz
27.7 Hz
69.4 Hz
fout=Output Frequency
95
The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity (kVA).
Voltage
Class (V)
Capacity
(kW)
Factory Setting
Setting
200 V Single-phase
or 3-phase
400 V
3-phase
Maximum
Continuous
Output
Current (A)
Carrier
Frequency
(kHz)
Continuous Output
Current
(Reduction
Output
Current)
(A)
FC =
14 kHz
0.1
4
10
0.8
0.25
4
10
1.6
0.55
4
10
3.0
1.1
4
10
5.0
1.5
3
7.5
8.0
7.0
6.0 (75%)
2.2
3
7.5
11.0
10.0
8.6 (78%)
4.0
3
7.5
17.5
16.5
14.0 (80%)
5.5
3
7.5
25
23
18.0 (72%)
7.5
3
7.5
33
30
22.1 (67%)
0.37
3
7.5
1.2
1.0
0.8 (67%)
0.55
3
7.5
1.8
1.6
1.28 (71%)
1.1
3
7.5
3.4
3.0
2.2 (65%)
1.5
3
7.5
4.8
4.0
3.2 (67%)
2.2
3
7.5
5.5
4.8
3.84 (70%)
3.0
3
7.5
7.2
6.3
4.9 (68%)
4.0
3
7.5
9.2
8.1
6.4 (74%)
5.5
3
7.5
14.8
*
12.0 (81%)
7.5
3
7.5
18
17
13.0 (72%)
* Reduction of the current is not necessary.
96
Reduced
Current
(A)
0.7 (88%)
-
1.4 (88%)
2.6 (87%)
4.3 (86%)
6 Programming Features
NOTE
1. Reduce the continuous output current when changing the
carrier frequency to 4 (10 kHz) for 200 V Class (1.5 kW
or more) and 400 V Class Inverters. Refer to the table
above for the reduced current.
Operation Condition
• Input power supply voltage:
3-phase 200 to 230 V (200 V Class)
Single-phase 200 to 240 V (200 V Class)
3-phase 380 to 460 V (400 V Class)
• Ambient temperature:
−10 to 50°C (14 to 122°F)
(Protection structure: open chassis type IP20,
IP00)
−10 to 40°C (14 to 105°F)
(Protection structure: enclosed wall-mounted
type NEMA 1 (TYPE 1))
2. If the wiring distance is long, reduce the Inverter carrier
frequency as described below.
Wiring Distance
between Inverter
and Motor
Up to 50 m
Up to 100 m
More than 100 m
Carrier Frequency (n080
setting)
10 kHz or less
(n080=1, 2, 3, 4,
7, 8, 9)
5 kHz or less
(n080=1, 2, 7, 8, 9)
2.5 kHz or less
(n080=1, 7, 8, 9)
3. Set the Carrier Frequency Selection (n080) to 1, 2, 3, or 4
when using vector control mode. Do not set it to 7, 8, or 9.
4. If the Inverter repeatedly stops and starts with a load
exceeding 120% of the Inverter rated current within a
cycle time of 10 minutes or less, reduce carrier frequency
at a low speed. (Set constant n175 to 1.)
5. The carrier frequency is automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz
when the Reducing Carrier Frequency Selection at Low
Speed (n175) is set to 1 and the following conditions are
satisfied:
Output frequency ≤ 5 Hz
Output current ≥ 110%
Factory setting: 0 (Disabled)
97
6. When a carrier frequency of 14 kHz (n080) is selected,
automatic carrier frequency reduction during low-speed
overcurrent is automatically enabled, even if the Reducing
Carrier Frequency Selection at Low Speed (n175) is set to
0 (disabled).
7. When the carrier frequency is set to 14 kHz, the following
functions will be disabled:
• Fast digital input (START/STOP)
• UP 2/DOWN 2
• Motor overheat protection using PTC thermistor input
• Bi-directional PID output
• Frequency offsets
Important
† Operator Stop Key Selection (n007)
WARNING The Digital Operator stop button can be disabled by a
setting in the Inverter. Install a separate emergency
stop switch.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
Set the processing when the STOP key is pressed during operation
either from a multi-function input terminal or communications.
98
Setting
Description
0
The STOP key is effective either from a multifunction input terminal or communications. When
the STOP key is pressed, the Inverter stops according to the setting of constant n005. At this
time, the Digital Operator displays a
alarm
(flashing). This Stop Command is held in the
Inverter until both Forward and Reverse Run
Commands are open, or until the Run Command
from communications goes to zero.
1
The STOP key is ineffective either from multifunction input terminals or communications.
6 Programming Features
† Second motor selection
This function switches between two motors for one Inverter. V/f control
must be used for the second motor. Switching is possible from a multifunction input.
The following constants are used as control constants for motor 2.
Constant
No.
−
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
V/f control must be
used.
−
Control Mode Selection
−
n140
Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency
0.1 Hz
50.0 to 400.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
n158
Motor 2 Maximum
Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 255.0 V*1
200.0 V
n147
Motor 2 Maximum
Voltage Output Frequency
0.1 Hz
0.2 to 400.0 Hz
50.0 Hz
n159
Motor 2 Middle Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 255.0 V*1
12.0 V
n014
Middle Output
Frequency
0.1 Hz
0.1 to 399.9 Hz
1.3 Hz
n160
Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
0.1 V
0.1 to 50.0 V*1
12.0 V
n161
Motor 2 Rated Current
0.1 A
0.0 to 150% of
Inverter rated current
*2
n162
Motor 2 Rated Slip
0.1 Hz
0.0 to 20.0 Hz
*2
*1
*1*2
*1*2
Note: Not initialized when constants are initialized.
* 1. Upper limit of setting range and factory setting are doubled for 400-V
Class Inverters.
* 2. Depends on Inverter capacity.
99
100
Constant
No.
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n057
Multi-function Output
Selection 1
(Contact output terminals MA-MB-MC)
0: Fault
1: Operating
2: Frequency agree
3: Zero speed
4: Frequency detection (≥ Detection
level)
5: Frequency detection (≤ Detection
level)
6: Overtorque detection (NO contact
output)
7: Overtorque detection (NC contact
output)
8: Undertorque detection (NO contact output)
9: Undertorque detection (NC contact output)
10: Minor fault (Alarm is indicated)
11: Base blocked
12: Operating mode
13: Inverter operation ready
14: Fault retry
15: UV
16: Reverse run
17: Speed search
18: Data output from communications
19: PID feedback loss
20: Frequency reference loss
21: Inverter overheat alert (OH3)
22: Motor selection monitor
0
n058
Multi-function Output
Selection 2
(Open-collector output terminals PHC1PHCC)
Same as constant 57
1
n059
Multi-function Output
Selection 3
(Open-collector output terminals PHC2PHCC)
Same as constant 57
2
6 Programming Features
Motor Switching
Command (Motor 2
selected when closed.)
U, V, W
(T2, T2, T3)
Digital input
Digital output
M1
IN
Motor 1 (main motor)
IN
Motor 2 (auxiliary motor)
M2
Motor Selection Monitor
(Motor 2 selected when
closed.)
Note: Switching of motor 1 and motor 2 as well as checking motor status
should be performed using an external sequence.
• By setting one of the constants from n050 to n056 (Multi-function
Input Selections) to 28 (Motor Switching Command) and by opening
and closing the input signal when stopped (i.e. while Inverter output
is OFF when the Run Command is OFF), the control mode, V/f characteristics, and motor constants stored in the Inverter can be selected.
• By setting one of the constants from n057 to n059 (Multi-function
Output Selections) to 22 (Motor Selection Monitor), the present
motor selection status can be monitored on a digital output terminal.
• The following shaded constants are switched for the Motor Switching
Command.
101
Motor Constant Table (New Parameters are shown in bold letters)
Motor Switching Command
Open
(Motor 1 Selected)
Closed
(Motor 2 Selected)
Control Mode
Selection
n002
V/f control must be used.
V/f
Characteristics
n011: Maximum Output Frequency
n012: Maximum Voltage
n013: Maximum Voltage Output
Frequency
n014: Middle Output Frequency
n015: Middle Output Frequency
Voltage
n016: Minimum Output Frequency
n017: Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
n140: Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency (2)
n158: Motor 2 Maximum Voltage
n147: Motor 2 Maximum Voltage Output Frequency
(2)
n014: Middle Output Frequency
(Same as motor 1)
n159: Motor 2 Middle Output
Frequency Voltage
n016: Minimum Output Frequency (Same as motor 1)
n160: Motor 2 Minimum Output Frequency Voltage
Motor Constants
n036: Motor Rated Current
n037: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
n038: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Time Constant
Setting
n093: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration
n094: Stall Prevention Level during Running
n104: Torque Compensation
Time Constant
n105: Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
n106: Motor Rated Slip
n107: Motor Line-to-Neutral Resistance
n108: Motor Leakage Inductance
n110: Motor No-load Current
n111: Slip Compensation Gain
n112: Slip Compensation Time
Constant
n161: Motor 2 Rated Current
n037: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
(Same as motor 1)
n038: Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Time Constant
Setting (Same as motor 1)
n093: Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration (Same as
motor 1)
n094: Stall Prevention Level during Running (Same as
motor 1)
n104: Torque Compensation
Time Constant (Same as
motor 1)
n105: Torque Compensation
Iron Loss (Same as motor
1)
n162: Motor 2 Rated Slip
n107: Motor Line-to-Neutral Resistance (Same as motor
1)
n110: Motor No-load Current
(Same as motor 1)
n111: Slip Compensation Gain
(Same as motor 1)
n112: Slip Compensation Time
Constant (Same as motor
1)
102
6 Programming Features
Motor Switching Command
Motor Selection
Monitor
Open
(Motor 1 Selected)
Closed
(Motor 2 Selected)
Open
Closed
Application Precautions
• Motor Switching Command and Motor Selection Monitor
When using the Motor Switching Command, be sure to switch the
motor when it is at a complete stop (i.e., while Inverter output is OFF
when the Run Command is OFF). Check the status of the Motor Selection Monitor and contactors M1 and M2 with an external sequence or
sequencer, and start Inverter operation only after confirming that the
motor has been switched. The motor switching process for the Inverter
takes 50 ms max.
If an attempt is made to switch the motor during operation or when the
motor is decelerating to a stop, the switching process will not be performed, a SEr (sequence error) alarm will be displayed, a multi-function
output alarm will be output to the Digital Operator, and operation will
continue. No error will be output. When the motor comes to a complete
stop (i.e., when the Inverter output is OFF), the switching process will
be performed.
• Electronic Thermal Motor Protection (OL1)
Electronic thermal motor protection is performed based on n036 (Motor
Rated Current) when motor 1 is selected and based on n161 (Motor 2
Rated Current) when motor 2 is selected. When a Motor Switching
Command is allocated for a multi-function input terminal, OL1 calculations for motor 1 and motor 2 are always performed regardless of the
status of the Motor Switching Command input terminal.
Output current detection data for OL1 calculations is provided separately for motor 1 and motor 2. (If motor 1 is selected, output current
detection data is calculated for motor 1 with the actual output current,
and output current detection data is calculated for motor 2 with an output current of 0.0 A. If motor 2 is selected, output current detection data
will be calculated for motor 2 with the actual output current, and output
current detection data will be calculated for motor 1 with an output current of 0.0 A. If motor 2 is selected, output current detection data will be
calculated for motor 2 with the actual output current, and output current
detection data will be calculated for motor 1 with an output current of
0.0 A.)
103
If constant n037 is set to 3 (standard motor, motor 1 only) or 4 (special
motor, motor 1 only), however, OL1 calculations for motor 1 will
always be performed, regardless of the status of the Motor Switching
Command. (Regardless of whether motor 1 or motor 2 is selected, output current detection data for motor 1 is calculated with the actual output current, and output current detection data for motor 2 is calculated
with an output current of 0.0 A.)
Constant
No.
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n037
Electronic Thermal
Motor Protection Selection
0: Electronic thermal characteristics
for standard motor
1: Electronic thermal characteristics
for special motor
2: No electronic thermal motor protection
3:Electronic thermal characteristics
for standard motor (motor 1 only)
4: Electronic thermal motor characteristics for special motor (motor 1
only)
0
• Maximum Frequency, Frequency Reference, Acceleration
Time, and Deceleration Time
When motor 1 is selected, operation is performed using n011 (Maximum Output Frequency) as the maximum frequency. Therefore, when
the set value of the Maximum Output Frequency (n011) and the set
value of the Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency (n140) are different,
operation is as follows:
1. Even when using an analog frequency reference with the same reference voltage (current), the frequency reference will differ by the
ratio between n011 and n140.
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz and n140 = 50 Hz, when the reference
voltage is 5 V (50%), motor 1 would rotate at 30 Hz and motor 2
would rotate at 25 Hz.
104
6 Programming Features
2. For a multi-step speed reference, the setting unit is Hz (absolute
value), and so the motor rotates at the commanded value regardless
of the motor selection status.
If a multi-step speed reference exceeding the selected maximum output frequency multiplied by the Frequency Reference Upper Limit
(n033) is mistakenly input, upper limit operation will be performed
at the selected maximum output frequency multiplied by the Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033).
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz, n140 = 50 Hz, and n033 = 100%, operation will be at 50 Hz when a multi-step speed reference of 60 Hz is
mistakenly input when motor 2 is selected.
3. Multi-step Speed Reference (n024 to n032) Upper Limit (Setting
Range Upper Limit)
The upper limit is Maximum Output Frequency (n011) for motor 1
or the Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency (n140), whichever is
greater, multiplied by the Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033).
4. The setting values of the Acceleration and Deceleration Times (n019
to n022) are the times required to reach the selected maximum output frequency.
Example: If n011 = 60 Hz, n140 = 50 Hz, and acceleration (deceleration) time = 10 s, motor 1 will accelerate (decelerate) for 5 s and
motor 2 will accelerate (decelerate) for 6 s to reach 30 Hz starting at
0 Hz (or to reach 0 Hz starting at 30 Hz).
Motor 2 Switching Time Chart
Example of Switching Operation from Motor 1 to Motor 2
Motor Switching Command
OFF
ON
M1 operation
Contact for
motor
switching
M2 operation
Motor Selection Monitor
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
50 ms max.
FWD (REV) Run Command
OFF
ON
FWD (REV) Run Command is turned ON after checking
the status of M1, M2, and the Motor Selction Monitor.
105
If the FWD/REV Run Command is turned ON after turning the Motor
Switching Command ON (or OFF) but before the Motor Selection Monitor turns ON (or OFF), Inverter output will begin immediately after the
Motor Selection Monitor turns ON (or OFF).
„ Selecting the Stopping Method
† Stopping Method Selection (n005)
Select the stopping method suitable for the application.
Setting
Description
0
Deceleration to a stop
1
Coast to a stop
Deceleration to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 is selected
Output
Frequency
Acceleration
Time 1
(n019)
FWD (REV)
Run
Command
Deceleration
Time 1 Deceleration
(n020) Time 1 (n020)
Min. Output Frequency
(Frequency at
DC Injection Braking
Startup) n016
(Factory Setting: 1.5 Hz)
Time
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop (n090)
(Factory Setting: 0.5 s)
* Changing the frequency reference while running
Upon termination of a FWD (REV) Run Command, the motor decelerates at the deceleration rate determined by the time set in Deceleration
Time 1 (n020) and DC injection braking is applied immediately before
stopping. DC injection braking is also applied when the motor decelerates because the frequency reference is set lower than the Min. Output
Frequency (n016) when the FWD (REV) Run Command is ON. If the
deceleration time is short or the load inertia is large, an overvoltage
(OV) fault may occur at deceleration. In this case, increase the deceleration time or install an optional Braking Resistor.
Braking torque:
Without braking resistor: Approx. 20% of motor
rating
With braking resistor: Approx. 150% of motor
rating
106
6 Programming Features
Coast to a Stop
Example when Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 is selected
Acceleration
Time 1
Deceleration
(n019)
Time 1
Output
Coast to a
(n020)
Frequency
stop
Time
FWD (REV)
Run Command
* Changing the frequency reference while running
Upon termination of the FWD (REV) Run Command, the motor
starts coasting.
† Applying DC Injection Braking
DC Injection Braking Current (n089)
Sets the DC injection braking current in units of 1%. (Inverter rated current=100%)
DC Injection Braking Time at Stop (n090)
Sets the DC injection braking time at stopping in units of 0.1 s. When
the setting of n090 is 0, DC injection braking is not performed, but the
Inverter output is turned OFF when DC injection braking is started.
n016 Min.
Output
Frequency
n090
DC Injection Braking
Time at Stop
When coasting to a stop is specified in the Stopping Method Selection
(n005), DC injection braking is not applied when stopping.
† Simple Positioning Control when Stopping
• If a sequence input terminal is used for a RUN/STOP sequence, simple positioning control when stopping can be used to reduce deviation in the position where the motor stops after the Run Command is
started from the sequence input terminal.
107
• Controlling the Stop Position Regardless of Output Frequency
Control is performed so that S, the travel distance from maximum
output frequency until decelerating to a stop, and S1, the travel distance from any frequency (less than maximum output frequency)
until decelerating to a stop, are the same. (Control is performed to
stop at the same position when the Run Command is input from a
sequence input terminal regardless of the output frequency.)
SPEED
SPEED
Max Output Frequency
Max Output Frequency
Output Frequency
S
S1
t
Tdec
FORWARD RUN
Command
RUN
t
FORWARD RUN
Command
STOP
Tdec
RUN
Fig.1
STOP
Fig.2
SPEED
Max Output Frequency
T1
Output Frequency
S-S1
S1
t
Tdec
FORWARD RUN
Command
RUN STOP
Fig.3
NOTE
108
Simple positioning control is not performed if the value of the
Maximum Output Frequency (n011) multiplied by the Deceleration Time (n020, n022, n042, or n044) is more than 8,589.
For example, simple positioning control is not performed if
the Deceleration Time is set to 143 s or higher at 60 Hz.
Constant
No.
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n143
Sequence Input Redundant Reading
Selection (Stop Position Control Selection)
0: 8-ms redundant reading
(Stop position control disabled.)
1: 2-ms redundant reading with only
stop position deviation reduction
2: 2-ms redundant reading with simple positioning control
0
n144
Stop Position Control Compensation
Gain
Setting unit: 0.01
Setting range: 0.50 to 2.55
1.00
6 Programming Features
Constants Requiring Restrictions
Constant
No.
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n023
S-curve Selection
0: No S-curve Characteristic
1: 0.2-s S-curve Characteristic
2: 0.5-s S-curve Characteristic
3: 1.0-s S-curve Characteristic
Note: S-curve characteristics are not
supported for simple positioning control, so use a set value
of 0.
0
n092
Stall Prevention during Deceleration
0: Stall prevention
1: No stall prevention (when a braking resistor is installed)
Note: If Stall Prevention during Deceleration is used with simple
positioning control, positioning will not be performed properly, so use a set value of 1.
0
109
„ Building Interface Circuits with External Devices
† Using Input Signals
The functions of multi-function input terminals S1 to S7 can be changed
as necessary by setting constants n050 to n056. The same value cannot
be set for more than one of these constants.
Setting
Name
Description
Ref.
page
0
FWD/REV Run Command
(3-wire sequence selection)*1
Setting enabled only for n052
(terminal S3)
112
1
Forward Run Command
(2-wire sequence selection)*1
64
2
Reverse Run Command
(2-wire sequence selection)*1
64
3
External fault
(NO contact input)
4
External fault
(NC contact input)
5
Fault Reset
6
Multi-step speed reference 1
66
7
Multi-step speed reference 2
66
8
Multi-step speed reference 3
66
9
Multi-step speed reference 4
66
10
Jog Command
75
11
Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 1
77
12
External Baseblock,
NO contact input
13
External Baseblock,
NC contact input
110
Inverter stops for an external
fault signal input. Digital
Operator displays EFo.*2
Resets a fault. Fault Reset not
effective when the RUN signal is ON.
Motor coasts to a stop for this
signal input. Digital Operator
displays
.
66
-
6 Programming Features
Setting
Name
Description
Ref.
page
14
Search Command from maximum frequency
Speed Search Command signal
88
15
Search Command from set
frequency
88
16
Acceleration/Deceleration
Hold Command
89
17
LOCAL/REMOTE selection
63
18
Communications/control circuit terminal selection
115
19
Emergency stop fault,
NO contact input
20
Emergency stop alarm,
NO contact input
21
Emergency stop fault,
NC contact input
22
Emergency stop alarm,
NC contact input
23
PID control cancel
167
24
PID integral reset
167
Inverter stops for an emergency stop signal input according
to the Stopping Method Selection (n005). When coast to
stop (n005 = 1) is selected,
the Inverter coasts to stop.
Digital Operator displays
(flashing).
-
25
PID integral hold
26
Inverter overheat alert
(OH3 alarm)
167
27
Acceleration/deceleration
time selection 2
77
28
Motor Switching Command
(Motor Selection)
99
29
Bi-directional PID prohibit
(ON: Prohibited)
163
30
Frequency offset input 1
85
31
Frequency offset input 2
85
32
Frequency offset input 3
85
When the Inverter overheat
signal turns ON,
(flashing) is displayed at the Digital
Operator.
-
111
Setting
Name
Description
33
no function
Ref.
page
-
34
UP/DOWNcommands
35 to
36
Do not set.
setting enabled only for n056
114
-
37
FWD/REV Run 2 Command
(2-wire sequence 2)
129
* 1. For more information on how to select the sequence polarity, refer to page
226.
* 2. Numbers 1 to 7 are displayed for † to indicate the terminal numbers S1 to
S7.
Factory Settings
No.
Terminal
Factory Setting
n050
S1
1
Forward Run Command
(2-wire sequence)
Function
n051
S2
2
Reverse Run Command
(2-wire sequence)
n052
S3
3
External fault (NO contact input)
n053
S4
5
Fault Reset
n054
S5
6
Multi-step speed reference 1
n055
S6
7
Multi-step speed reference 2
n056
S7
10
Jog Command
Terminal Functions for 3-wire Sequence Selection
When 0 is set for terminal S3 (n052), terminal S1 is the Run Command,
terminal S2 is the Stop Command, and terminal S3 is the FWD/REV
Run Command.
RUN SW
STOP SW (NO Contact)
(NC Contact)
V7AZ
Run Command
(Run when Closed)
Stop Command
(Stop when Open)
FWD/REV Run Selection
FWD Run When Open
REV Run When Closed
112
6 Programming Features
WARNING To select the 3-wire sequence, set terminal S3 (n052)
to 0.
Failure to observe this warning may result in injury.
LOCAL/REMOTE Selection (Setting: 17)
Select the operation reference from either the Digital Operator or from
the settings of the Run Command Selection (n003) and Frequency Reference Selection (n004). The LOCAL/REMOTE Selection can be used
only when stopped.
Open: Run according to the setting of Run Command Selection
(n003) or Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Closed: Run according to the frequency reference and Run Command
from the Digital Operator.
Example: Set n003=1, n004=2, n008=0.
Open: Run according to the frequency reference from multi-function
input terminal FR and Run Command from multi-function
input terminals S1 to S7.
Closed: Run according to the potentiometer frequency reference and
Run Command from the Digital Operator.
Up/Down Commands (Setting: n056 = 34)
When the FWD (REV) Run Command is ON, acceleration/deceleration
is enabled by inputting the UP or DOWN signal from multi-function
input terminals S6 and S7 without changing the frequency reference.
Operation can thus be performed at the desired speed. When Up/Down
Commands are specified in n056, any function set in n055 is disabled,
terminal S6 is the input terminal for the Up Command, and terminal S7
is the input terminal for the Down Command.
Multi-function Input Terminal S6 (Up Command)
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
Multi-function Input Terminal S7 (Down Command)
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Acceleration
Deceleration
Hold
Hold
Operation Status
113
Time Chart for Up/Down Command Input
FWD Run
Up Command S6
Down Command S7
Upper Limit Speed
Lower Limit Speed
Output Frequency
Frequency Agree
Signal
U = Up (accelerating) status
D = Down (decelerating) status
H = Hold (constant speed) status
U1 = Up status, clamping at upper limit speed
D1 = Down status, clamping at lower limit speed
Note: 1. When Up/Down Commands are selected, the upper limit speed is set
regardless of frequency reference.
Upper limit speed = Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
× Frequency Reference Upper Limit (n033)/100
2. Lower limit value is either the Minimum Output Frequency (n016) or
the Frequency Reference Lower Limit (n034) (whichever is larger.).
3. When the FWD (REV) Run Command is input, operation starts at the
lower limit speed without using the Up/Down Commands.
4. If the Jog Command is input while running for an Up/Down Command, the Jog Command has priority.
5. Multi-step speed references 1 to 4 are not effective when an Up/Down
Command is selected.
6. When 1 is set for the HOLD Output Frequency Memory Selection
(n100), the output frequency can be recorded during HOLD.
Setting
114
Description
0
Output frequency is not recorded during
HOLD.
1
When HOLD status is continued for 5 seconds
or longer, the output frequency during HOLD
is recorded and the Inverter restarts at the recorded frequency.
6 Programming Features
Communications/Control Circuit Terminal Selection
(Setting: 18)
Operation can be changed from communications commands, or from
control circuit terminal or Digital Operator commands.
Run Commands from communications and the frequency reference are
effective when the multi-function input terminal for this setting is
closed (register No. 0001H, 0002H).
Run Commands in LOCAL/REMOTE mode and the frequency reference are effective when the terminal is open.
Up/Down Command 2 (Setting: n056 = 36)
This function works like standard Up/Down commands but with additional functionallity:
No.
Name
n056
Multi-function Input
Selection S7
n045
Frequency
reference bias step
amount
(Up/Down2)
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
When n056=36 is selected,
the Up/Down 2 function is
allocated to S6(Up) and
S7(Down). Setting of n055
has no effect.
1 to 37
10
0: Bias value increase/
decrease by ramp time (n019/
020 or n043/044) dependent
on n046.
0.00 to
99.99
Hz
0Hz
>0: When Up/Down 2 (S6/S7)
is switched, bias value is
increased/decreased by the
value of n045.
n046
Frequency Reference Bias
Accel/Decel Rate
during Up/Down 2
Selection of Accel/Decel time
rate.
0: Accel/Decel time 1
(n019/n020)
1: Accel/Decel time 4
(n043/n044)
0, 1
0
n047
Operation after
removing Up/Down
command 2
only effective for n045 and
n100=0
0: Bias value will be held
1: Bias value will be reset to
previous frequency reference
0, 1
0
115
No.
Name
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n048
Frequency Reference Bias value
of Up/Down
command 2
100% =max. frequency (n011)
Bias value is stored in n048
when Up/Down 2 command is
completed.
n048 is limited by setting of
n171 and n172.
The setting of n048 has no
effect under following conditions:
• Up/Down 2 function is not
selected (n056 <> 36)
• Frequency reference
method is changed (n004
setting)
• n100 is changed from 0 to 1
• n100=0 and Run signal is
OFF
• When n045= 0 and n047= 1
and S6/S7 are both set ON
or OFF
• Max. frequency (n011) is
changed
-99.9 to
100.0%
0.0%
n049
Analogue Frequency Reference Fluctuation Limit, Up/
Down command 2
If analogue reference (or
pulse train) value change is
bigger than value of n049,
bias value is cleared.
0.1 to
100.0%
1.0%
n171
Frequenc Reference Bias upper
limit, Up/Down
command 2
The Up/Down 2 bias value is
limited by n171 (upper limit)
Limit is fixed to:
Fref + (Fmax x n171) / 100
0.0 to
100%
0.0%
n172
Frequenc Reference Bias lower
limit, Up/Down
command 2
The Up/Down 2 bias value is
limited by n172 (lower limit)
Limit is fixed to:
Fref - (Fmax x n172) / 100
-99.9 to
0.0%
0.0%
n100
Hold output frequency saving selection
Selects if bias value is saved
to EEPROM after RUN signal
is removed (frequency must
be hold for more than 5s).
0: not saved to EEPROM.
1: saved to EEPROM
0, 1
0
U-19
Frequency Reference Bias monitor
Displays the frequency offset
caused by Up/Down command 2
-99.99
to
100%
-
116
6 Programming Features
If n045 > 0 the frequency reference is changed in steps of n045 value
Fref
Reference changes
according to setting in n045
n045
S6
S7
For n045=0, acceleration / deceleration rate is selected by n046:
n046 = 0: Accel/Decel time 1 time (n019 / n020)
n046 = 1: Accel/Decel time 4 (n043 / n044)
Acceleration rate ,
sel. by n046
Deceleration rate ,
sel. by n046
Fref
S6
S7
Saving of the Up/Down 2 bias to the EEPROM if save mode n100=1 is
selected (Frequency reference has to remain for 5 sec)
Up 2/ Down 2 bias is saved,
when Run signal is removed
5 sec
n100 = 1
5 sec
Fref
Up 2/ Down 2 bias is not saved ,
when Run signal is removed
S6
S7
117
Up/Down Command 2, Examples
Up/Down Command 2 by time
n056 = 36 Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
n003 = 1
Run command source is digital input
n004 = 1
Main frequency reference input is n024
n045 = 0
Frequency reference bias is changed by time
n046 = 1
Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
n047 = 0
Bias value is held if S6, S7 are both ON or OFF
n100 = 1
Bias value is saved to EEPROM
FOUT(Hz)
40Hz
35Hz
Decel 1
Decel 4
25Hz
Decel 1
Accel 1
Accel 4
Decel 1
10Hz
Time
Fref bias, by
Up2/Down2
(n048)
30Hz
-10Hz
RUN command
5s
UP 2 Command
5s
DOWN2 Command
Multi-step speed
command
n024 ( 35Hz)
Frequency reference
FREF is stored
into n024 and Fref
bias is cleared
118
n024
(25Hz)
n 025 (10Hz)
n 025 =40Hz
Frequency reference
FOUT is stored
into n024 and Fref
bias is cleared
n 024 ( 25Hz)
6 Programming Features
Up/Down Command 2 by step
n056 = 36
n003 = 1
n004 = 1
n045 = 5.00Hz
n046 = 1
n047
n100 = 1
Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
Run command source is digital input
Main frequency reference input is n024
Frequency reference bias is changed by step
Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
not active
Bias value is saved to EEPROM
FOUT(Hz)
FOUT
40Hz
35Hz
FREF
Decel 4
5s
Decel 1
n045
25Hz
5 sec
Accel 1
Decel 1
Accel 4
Decel 1
10Hz
FREF bias, by
Up2/Down2
(n048)
TIME
30Hz
-10Hz
RUN command
UP 2 Command
DOWN2 Command
Multi-step speed
command
n 025 (10Hz)
n 024 (35Hz)
(n024=25Hz)
Frequency reference is
stored into n024 and
FREF bias is cleared .
n 024 (25Hz)
(n025= 40Hz)
Frequency reference is
stored into n 025 and
FREF bias is cleared.
119
Up/Down Command 2 by time and return to original frequency
reference when S6, S7 = OFF
n056 = 36
n003 = 1
n004 = 1
n045 = 0
n046 = 1
n047 = 1
n100 = 1
Up/Down command 2 on S6 / S7
Run command source is digital input
Main frequency reference input is n024
Frequency reference bias is changed by time
Use Acceleration / Deceleration time 4
Bias value is held if S6, S7 are both ON or OFF
Bias value is saved to EEPROM
FOUT(Hz)
35Hz
Decel 4
Decel 1
Accel 1
Decel 1
Accel 1
Accel 1
Accel 4
Decel 1
10Hz
TIME
RUN command
UP 2 Command
DOWN2 Command
Multi-step speed
command
n 024 ( 35Hz)
n 025 (10Hz)
n 024 (35Hz)
† Using the Multi-function Analog Inputs (n077, n078, n079)
The input analog signal (0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA) for the CN2 terminal
of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator can be used as an auxiliary function
for the master frequency reference input to the control circuit terminals
(FR or RP). Refer to the block diagram on page 167 for details on the
input signal.
When using the signal for the CN2 terminal of the JVOP-140
NOTE Digital Operator as a multi-function analog input, never use it
for the target value or the feedback value of PID control.
120
6 Programming Features
Multi-function Input Selection (n077)
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n077
Multi-function Input Selection
-
0 to 4
0
121
n077 Settings
Setting
Function
Description
0
Disabled
The multi-function input is disabled.
1
Auxiliary frequency
reference (FREF2)
When frequency reference 2 is selected using the multi-step speed references, the input analog signal for the CN2
terminal will be the frequency reference. The n025 setting will be invalid.
Note: Set the Frequency Reference Gain in
n068 or n071, and the Frequency Reference Bias in n069 or n072.
122
2
Frequency reference gain (FGAIN)
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or
n074 and the FBIAS to constant n061
or n075 for the master frequency reference. Then, multiply the resulting frequency reference by the FGAIN.
3
Frequency reference bias (FBIAS)
Set the FGAIN to constant n060 or
n074 and the FBIAS to constant n061
or n075 for the master frequency reference.
Then, add the FBIAS to the resulting
frequency reference.
The amount of the FBIAS to be added
is set to n079.
4
Output voltage bias
(VBIAS)
Add the VBIAS to the output voltage after V/f conversion.
6 Programming Features
Analog Input Level
1. Auxiliary Frequency Reference
(n077=1)
2. Frequency Reference Gain
(n077=2)
FREF2
FGAIN
100%
2.00
1.00
0%
0V
10 V
(4 mA)
(20 mA)
100%=Max. Output Frequency (n011)
0
0V
(4 mA)
5V
10 V
(20 mA)
3. Frequency Reference Bias (n077=3) 4. Output Voltage Bias (n077=4)
VBIAS
FBIAS
100 V
n079
0% 0V
(4 mA)
5V
10 V
(20 mA)
-n079
0V
0V
(4 mA)
10 V
(20 mA)
The VBIAS value to be added is
doubled for 400 V Class Inverters.
Multi-function Analog Input Signal Selection (n078)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
n078
Multi-function
Analog Input Signal
Selection
-
0=Digital Operator terminal
(voltage: 0 to 10 V)
1=Digital Operator terminal
(current: 4 to 20 mA)
0
Frequency Reference Bias Setting (n079)
Constant
No.
n079
Name
Frequency
Reference
Bias Setting
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
1%
0 to 50
100 %/Max. Output Frequency
(n011)
10
123
† Using Output Signals (n057, n058, n059)
The functions of multi-function output terminals MA, MB, P1 and P2
can be changed as necessary by setting constants n057, n058, and n059.
• Terminal MA and MB functions: Set in n057
• Terminal P1 function: Set in n058
• Terminal P2 function: Set in n059
Setting
Name
Description
Ref.
page
0
Fault
Closed when Inverter fault occurs.
-
1
Operating
Closed when either FWD/REV Run
Command is input or voltage is output
from the Inverter.
-
2
Frequency agree
Closed when the set frequency agrees
with Inverter output frequency.
125
3
Zero speed
Closed when Inverter output frequency
is less than minimum output frequency.
-
4
Frequency detection 1
Output frequency ≥ Frequency Detection Level (n095)
82
5
Frequency detection 2
Output frequency ≤ Frequency Detection Level (n095)
82
6
Overtorque detection,
NO contact output
-
81
7
Overtorque detection,
NC contact output
-
81
8
Undertorque detected,
NO contact output
-
185
9
Undertorque detected,
NC contact output
-
185
10
Minor fault
Closed when an alarm has been detected.
-
11
Base blocked
Closed when the Inverter output is
OFF.
-
12
Operating mode
Closed when LOCAL is selected for the
LOCAL/REMOTE selection.
-
13
Inverter operation
ready
Closed when an Inverter fault is not detected, and operation is ready.
-
14
Fault retry
Closed during fault retries.
-
15
UV
Closed when undervoltage is detected.
-
124
6 Programming Features
Setting
Name
Description
Ref.
page
16
Reverse run
Closed during reverse run.
-
17
Speed search
Closed when Inverter conducts a
speed search.
-
18
Data output from communications
Operates multi-function output terminal independently from Inverter operation
(by MEMOBUS communication)
141
19
PID feedback loss
Closed during PID feedback loss.
163
20
Frequency reference
loss
Closed during frequency reference
loss.
183
21
Inverter overheat alert
Closed during Inverter overheat alert.
111
22
monitor motor selection closed during select motor 2
-
Factory Settings
No.
Terminal
n057
MA, MB
Factory Setting
0 (fault)
n058
P1
1 (operating)
n059
P2
2 (frequency agree)
• Frequency Agree Signal (setting=2)
Detection Width
±2 Hz
Release Width
±4 Hz
Output Frequency
Frequency Agree Signal
125
„ Setting Frequency by Current Reference Input
When setting the frequency by
inputting a current reference (4 to
20 mA or 0 to 20 mA) from the
control circuit terminal FR, switch
the DIP switch SW2 on the control circuit board to the “I” side.
SW2
SW2
V
NOTE
126
I
Never input a voltage reference to control circuit terminal FR
when DIP switch SW2 is switched to the “I” side. The
Inverter might be damaged.
6 Programming Features
Current Reference Selection
After changing the DIP switch (V-I switch of SW2) to the “I” side,
press PRGM on the Digital Operator, then set the following constants.
Current reference (4 to 20 mA): constant n004 = 3
Current reference (0 to 20 mA): constant n004 = 4
• Setting: n003 = 0
IM
Current
Reference
4 to 20 mA
or
0 to 20 mA
(n004 = 3 or 4
FS
FR
FC
Press the Digital Operator keys to run
or stop the Inverter. Switch FWD and
REV run by setting the F/R LED.
Set the frequency by the analog current signal [0 % to 100 % (max. frequency)/4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA]
connected to the control circuit terminals.
• Setting: n003 = 1
IM
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
Current
Reference
4 to 20 mA
or
0 to 20 mA
(n004 = 3 or 4)
S1
S2
SC
FS
FR
FC
Switch run/stop and FWD/REV run
with switching device connected to the
control circuit terminal.
Multi-function input terminals S1 and
S2 are set to Forward run/stop
(n050=1) and Reverse run/stop
(n051=2) respectively.
Set frequency by the analog current
signal [0 % to 100 % (max. frequency)/4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA] connected to the control circuit terminal.
Frequency reference gain (n060)/bias (n061) can be set even when current reference input is selected. For details, refer to Adjusting Speed
Setting Signal on page 76.
127
„ Frequency Reference by Pulse Train Input
Frequency reference can be set by pulse train input from the control circuit terminals.
• Input pulse specifications
• Low-level voltage: 0.8 V or less
• High-level voltage: 3.5 to 32 V
• H duty: 30 % to 70 %
• Pulse frequency: 0 to 33 kHz
• Frequency reference method
Frequency reference is a value obtained by multiplying the ratio of
the maximum input pulse frequency and actual input pulse frequency by the maximum output frequency.
Input pulse frequency
Reference
Maximum output
×
frequency = Maximum pulse train frequency (n149) × 10 frequency (n011)
IM
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
S1
S2
SC
Pulse
Reference
Device
Constant
No.
RP
FC
Name
Run/stop and FWD/REV run can be
selected by a switch connected
to the multi-function input.
[Set S1 and S2 to FWD run/stop
(n050 = 1) or REV run/stop (n051 = 2).]
Set the frequency by a pulse train
input signal [0 % to 100 %
(maximum frequency)/0 to 33 kHz]
from the control circuit terminal.
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n003
Run Command Selection
-
0 to 3
0
n004
Frequency Reference
Selection
-
0 to 9
1
n149
Pulse Train Input Scaling
1=10
Hz
100 to 3300
(33 kHz)
2500
(25 kHz)
128
6 Programming Features
„ Two-wire Sequence 2
Additional to the standard 2-wire or 3-wire sequence a new 2-wire
sequence 2 is available which features a FWD/REV Run 2 Command
(setting 37 for one of the Multi-function Input Selection 1 to 7, constants n050 to n056).
Whenever this FWD/REV Run 2 Command is programmed to one of
the Multi-function Digital Inputs, it switches between forward (ON) and
reverse (OFF) operation, while the standard FWD Run Command (set
value 1 for n050 to n056) works as a RUN/STOP command (i.e. it starts
and stops the inverter operation).
An “ERR” alarm will be displayed when it is tried to set the REV Run
Command (set value: 2) and the FWD/REV Run 2 Command (set value:
37) simultaneously. If this is attempted via communications, constant
setting error message "oP8" will be displayed, and operation will not be
possible.
The following time chart shows the operation of the traditional 2-wire
and 3-wire sequences and the operation of 2-wire sequence 2.
1. Traditional 2-wire Sequence:
Multi-function Input Selection 1 (constant n050): 1
Multi-function Input Selection 2 (constant n051): 2
Multi-function Input Selection 3 (constant n052): Not 0
FWD Run
Output frequency
OFF
S1 terminal: FWD Run Command
OFF
S2 terminal: REV Run Command
ON
REV Run
ON
129
2. Three-wire Sequence
Multi-function input selection 1 (constant n050): 1 (Any setting)
Multi-function input selection 2 (constant n051): 2 (Any setting)
Multi-function input selection 3 (constant n052): 0
FWD Run
FWD Run
Output frequency
S1 terminal:
OFF
Run Command
ON
S2 terminal:
Stop Command
ON
REV Run
OFF
ON
S3 terminal:
OFF
FWD/REV Run
Command
3. Two-wire Sequence 2 (Special Specifications):
Multi-function input selection 1 (constant n050): 1
Multi-function input selection 2 (constant n051): 37
Multi-function input selection 3 (constant n052): Not 0
FWD Run
Output frequency
S1 terminal:
OFF
Run/Stop Command
S2 terminal:
OFF
FWD/REV Run 2 Command
130
ON
REV Run
ON
6 Programming Features
„ Preventing the Motor from Stalling (Current
Limit)
This function automatically adjusts the output frequency and output current according to the load to continue operation without stalling the
motor.
Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level during Acceleration
(n093)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level during acceleration in units
of 1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 170%
A setting of 200% disables the stall prevention (current limit) during
acceleration. If the output current exceeds the value set for n093 during
acceleration, acceleration stops and the frequency is maintained. When
the output current goes to the value set for n093, acceleration starts.
Motor Current
n093
*2
Time
Output
Frequency
*1: Stops the acceleration to prevent the motor
from stalling.
*2: Release width (hysteresis) of stall
prevention during acceleration is approx. 5% of
inverter rated current.
Time
*1
In the constant output area (output frequency > Max. Voltage Output
Frequency (n013)), the stall prevention (current limit) level during
acceleration is automatically decreased using the following equation.
Stall prevention during accel. in constant output area =
Max. Voltage Output Freq.(n013)
Stall Prevention Level During Accel.(n093) × --------------------------------------------------------------------------------Output frequency
131
Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration
Stall Prevention Level During
Acceleration (n093)
Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration (40% of n093)
Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
n013
Output Frequency
Stall Prevention (Current Limit) Level while Running (n094)
Sets the stall prevention (current limit) level while running in units of
1%. (Inverter rated current = 100%)
Factory setting: 160%
A setting of 200% disables stall prevention (current limit) while running.
If the stall prevention action current at speed agreement exceeds the
value set for n094 for longer than 100 ms, deceleration starts.
If the output current exceeds the value set for n094, deceleration continues. If the output current goes to the value set for n094, acceleration to
the set frequency starts.
Stall prevention acceleration/deceleration settings during operation are
set either for the currently selected Acceleration Time, i.e., for Acceleration Time 1 (n019) and Deceleration Time 1 (n020), or for Acceleration Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time 2 (n022).
Motor Current
n094
*2
Time
Output
Frequency
100 ms
Time
*1
132
*1: Decreases the frequency to prevent the mo
from stalling.
*2: At the start of acceleration, the output curre
hysterisis is approx. 5% of Inverter rated
current.
6 Programming Features
† Stall Prevention during Operation
Stall Prevention above Base Speed during Run (n115)
The stall prevention level can be decreased automatically in the constant
output range.
Constant
No.
n115
Name
Unit
Stall Prevention above
Base Speed during Run
-
Setting
Range
0=Disabled
1=Enabled
Factory
Setting
0
n115 Settings
Setting
Function
0
The stall prevention level is the level set for constant n094
in all frequency areas.
1
The following figure shows how the stall prevention level is
automatically decreased in the constant output range
(Max. frequency > Max. Voltage Output Frequency
(n013)).
The lower limit is 40% of the set value of n094.
Constant Output Area
Operation Level
n094
Operation Level
Max. Voltage Output Frequency n013
n094
Output Frequency
Lower Limit
40% of n094
Output Frequency
n013
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection during Stall Prevention (n116)
With this function, Acceleration Time 2 (n021) and Deceleration Time
2 (n022) can be fixed as the acceleration/deceleration time when moving to prevent stalling during operation.
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
n116
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time Selection during
Stall Prevention
-
Setting
Range
0=Disabled
1=Enabled
Factory
Setting
0
133
n116 Settings
Setting
Function
0
Standard Selection Acceleration/Deceleration Time 1 or 2.
1
Automatic Selection Acceleration/Deceleration Time 2
(n021, n022).
Setting
Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
0
Provided
1
Not provided (with braking
resistor mounted)
Frequency
• Stall Prevention during Deceleration (n092)
To prevent overvoltage during deceleration, the Inverter automatically extends the deceleration time according to the value of the
main circuit DC voltage. When using an optional braking resistor,
set n092 to 1.
Controls the deceleration
time to prevent overvoltage.
Set
Decel
Time
Time
Note: If Stall Prevention during Deceleration is used with simple positioning
control, positioning will not be performed properly, so use a set value of
1.
134
6 Programming Features
„ Decreasing Motor Speed Fluctuation
† Slip Compensation (n002 = 0)
As the load becomes larger, the motor speed is reduced and the motor
slip value is increased. The slip compensating function controls the
motor speed at a constant value even if the load varies.
When the Inverter output current is equal to the Motor Rated Current
(n036), the compensation frequency is added to the output frequency.
Compensation Frequency = Motor Rated Slip (n106)
Motor Rated Slip (n106) – Motor No-load Current (n110)
× --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Motor Rated Current (n036) – Motor No-load Current (n110)
× SlipCompensationGain ( n110 )
Related Constants
Constant
No.
Name
n036
Motor Rated Current
Unit
0.1 A
Setting Range
0% to 150% of Inverter rated current
n111
Slip Compensation Gain
0.1
0.0 to 2.5
n110
Motor No-load Current
1%
0% to 99%
(100%=Motor Rated
Current n036)
n112
Slip Compensation Time
Constant
n106
Motor Rated Slip
0.1 s
0.0 to 25.5 s
When 0.0 s is set,
delay time is 2.0 s.
0.1 Hz 0.0 to 20 Hz
Factory
Setting
*
0.0
*
2.0 s
*
* Depends on Inverter capacity. (Refer to pages 245 and 246.)
Note: 1. Slip compensation is not performed under the following condition:
Output frequency < Minimum Output Frequency (n016)
2. Slip compensation is not performed during regeneration.
3. Slip compensation is not performed when the Motor Rated Current
(n036) is set to 0.0 A.
135
„ Motor Protection
† Motor Overload Detection
The V7AZ protects against motor overload with a built-in electronic
thermal overload relay.
Motor Rated Current (Electronic Thermal Reference Current,
n036)
Set the rated current value shown on the motor nameplate.
Note: Setting n036 to 0.0 A disables the motor overload protective function.
Motor Overload Protection Selection (n037, n038)
n037
Setting
0
Electronic Thermal Characteristics
For general-purpose motor
1
For Inverter motor
2
Electronic thermal overload protection not provided.
Constant
No.
n038
Name
Electronic Thermal
Motor Protection
Time Constant Setting
Unit
1 min
Setting Range
1 to 60 min
Factory
Setting
8 min
The electronic thermal overload function monitors the motor temperature based on Inverter output current and time to protect the motor from
overheating. When the electronic thermal overload relay is enabled, an
error occurs, and the Inverter output is turned OFF to prevent
excessive overheating in the motor. When operating with one Inverter
connected to one motor, an external thermal relay is not needed. When
operating more than one motor with one Inverter, install a thermal relay
on each motor.
General-purpose Motors and Inverter Motors
Induction motors are classified as general-purpose motors or Inverter
motors based on their cooling capabilities. The motor overload function
operates differently for these two motor types.
136
6 Programming Features
Example for 200 V Class Motors
General-purpose
Cooling Effect
Effective
when operated at 50/60 Hz
from commercial power
supply
Torque Characteristics
60 s
Short-term
Continuous
rating
Torque
(%)
Electronic
Thermal Overload
An
error (motor overload protection)
occurs when
continuously
operated at 50/
60 Hz or less at
100% load.
50
Operation Frequency (Hz)
Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 50 Hz, 220 V Input Voltage)
For low-speed operation, torque
must be limited in order to stop motor temperature rise.
Inverter Motor
Effective even
when operated at low
speed (approx. 6 Hz)
60 s
Short-term
Continuous
rating
Torque
(%)
Electronic thermal overload
protection is
not activated
even for continuous operation
at 50/60 Hz or
less at a 100%
load.
50
Operation Frequency (Hz)
Base Frequency 60 Hz
(V/f for 50 Hz, 220 V Input Voltage)
Use an Inverter motor for continuous
operation at low speed.
137
† PTC Thermistor Input for Motor Overheat Protection
Motor protection is performed using the temperature-resistance characteristics of the positive temperature coefficient (PTC) thermistor, which
is embedded in the coil for each motor phase.
The following graph shows the characteristics of the PTC temperatureresistance value.
Resistance (Ω)
Class F
Class H
Tr: Temperature Threshold
Varies depending on the PTC type, but
the resistance value is nearly the same.
For example Tr = Class F, 150°C
Tr' = Class H, 180°C
1330
550
Tr − 5 Tr Tr + 5 Tr'
Temperature
The voltage across the ends of three PTC thermistors connected in
series is input to an analog input terminal (FR), and motor OH alarms
and motor OH errors are detected according to the voltage in respect to
the temperature-resistance characteristics of the PTC thermistor.
After a motor OH alarm is detected (FR input > 0.94 V), operation continues according to the n141 Motor Overheat Operation Selection (and
the OH8 indicator on the Digital Operator will flash).
After a motor error is detected (FR input > 1.87 V), the motor stops
according to the n141 Motor Overheat Operation Selection (and the
OH9 indicator on the Digital Operator will flash).
138
6 Programming Features
Constant
No.
Name
n141
PTC Thermistor Input Motor Overheat
Protection Selection
Description
0: No overheat protection with PTC
thermistor input (FR)
Factory
Setting
0
1 or higher: Overheat protection with
PTC thermistor input (FR)
Note:
oH8 / oH9 alarm: User can select the
inverter decelerate to a stop or not.
1: Only oH8 alarm, not to a stop.
2: oH8 alarm, and decelerate to a
stop (oH9 fault output).
3: oH8 alarm, and decelerate to a
stop (oH9 fault output) using n022
(Deceleration Time 2) deceleration time
4: oH8 alarm, and coasting to a stop
(oH9 fault output) .
5: not oH8 alarm, and decelerate to
a stop (oH9 fault output).
6: not oH8 alarm, and decelerate to
a stop (oH9 fault output) using
n022 (Deceleration Time 2) deceleration time.
7: not oH8 alarm, and coasting to a
stop (oH9 fault output).
n142
Motor Temperature
Input Filter Time
Constant
Setting Unit: 0.1 s
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 s
0.2
sec
Note: When the analog signal (0 to 10 V) input into terminal FR is used as the
motor overheat signal for the PTC thermistor input (FR) (when n141 is
set to 1 or higher), the signal cannot be used as a frequency reference or
for PID feedback. (There are restrictions when setting constants.)
The following settings cannot be set from the Digital Operator. (After
the error is displayed on the Digital Operator, the value returns to the
value before the change.)
If the following settings are set from the MEMOBUS, a constant setting
error will occur. (oP7 will flash on the Digital Operator.)
139
• When n141 is set to 1 or higher:
n004 (Frequency Reference Selection) cannot be set to 2, 3, or 4 (frequency reference of 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to 20 mA, respectively).
When n128 (PID Control Selection) is set to a value other than 0
(with PID control), n164 (PID Feedback Value Selection) cannot be
set to 0, 1, or 2 (feedback values of 0 to 10 V, 4 to 20 mA, or 0 to
20 mA, respectively).
• Constant n141 cannot be set to 1 when n004 is set to 2, 3, or 4, and
n128 is set to 1 and n164 is set to 0,1, or 2.
Terminal Connection Diagram of PTC Thermistor Input Motor Overheat Protection
Multi-function
input
MA
MB Multi-function
output
MC
+V (+12 V)
Voltage divider,
18 kΩ
PTC thermistor
P1
FR
(0 to 10 V:
20 kΩ)
P2
FC
Note: When performing motor overheat
protection using the PTC
thermistor input, be sure to set the
V-I switch (SW2) on the DIP switch
on the control circuit board to V.
140
Multi-function
output PHC
PC
OFF
V
SW2
ON
I
6 Programming Features
„ Selecting Cooling Fan Operation
In order to increase the life of the cooling fan, the fan can be set to operate only when Inverter is running
n039
= 0 (Factory setting): Operates only when Inverter is running
(Continues operation for 1 minute after
Inverter is stopped.)
=1:
Operates with power ON.
„ Using MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications
Serial communication is available with V7AZ using a programmable
controller (MEMOCON series) and MEMOBUS (MODBUS). Refer to
the MEMOBUS Instruction Manual (Manual No.: TOEZ-C736-70.1)
for details of communications.
† MEMOBUS (MODBUS) Communications
The MEMOBUS system is composed of a single master (PLC) and
slaves (1 to 31 V7AZ units).
Communication between master and slave (serial communication) is
controlled according to the master program with the master initiating
communication and the slave responding.
The master sends a signal to one slave at a time. Each slave has a preregistered address number, and the master specifies the number and
conducts signal communications. The slave receives the communications to carry out designated functions and reply to the master.
OMRON PLC
V7AZ
V7AZ
V7AZ
Example of RS-485
communication
141
† Communications Specifications
Interface
RS-422, RS-485
Synchronization
Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communication
Parameters
Baud rate: Selected from 2400/4800/9600/19200 bps
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Selected from even/odd/none
Stop bits: 1 bit fixed
Communication
Protocol
MEMOBUS (MODBUS) (RTU mode only)
Max. Number of
Inverters That Can Be
Connected
31 (When using RS-485)
† Communications Connection Terminal
Use the following S+, S-, R+ and R- terminals for MEMOBUS communications. Change the termination resistor as shown below.
At RS-422, RS-485 communications: Turn ON SW2 ON/OFF switch of
only the Inverter at the termination viewed from the PLC.
S+
S-
RS-422A
or RS-485
R+
SW2
RTerminal Resistor (1/2 W, 120 Ω)
SW2 ON/OFF Switch
SW2
SW1
PNP
NPN
OFF
V
ON
I
S5 S6 S7 P1 P2 R+ R- FS FR FC
S1 S2 S3 S4 SC PC S+ S- AM AC RP
Note: 1. Separate the wiring for communication from the
main circuit wiring or other power lines.
2. Use shielded cables for communication wiring;
R+
RP2
connect the shielded sheath to the ground terminal
and terminate the other end to prevent it from
PC
SS+
being connected (to prevent noise malfunction).
3. When communication is performed through RS485, connect S+ and R+, S- and R- terminals outside the Inverter as
shown at the right.
142
6 Programming Features
Procedure for Communications with PLC
The following shows the procedure for communications with a PLC.
1. Connect the communication cable between the PLC and the V7AZ
with the power supply turned OFF.
2. Turn the power ON.
3. Set the constants (n151 to n157) required for communication by
using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn the power OFF once to verify that the Digital Operator displays
have been completely erased.
5. Turn the power ON again.
6. Communications with the PLC starts.
† Setting Constants Necessary for Communication
Communication related constants must be set for PLC communication.
Constants n151 to n157 cannot be set by communication. Always set
them before performing communication.
Constant
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n003
Run Command
Selection
0: Digital Operator
1: Control circuit terminals
2: MEMOBUS communications
3: Communications card (optional)
0
n004
Frequency Reference Selection
0: Potentiometer (Digital Operator)
1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)
2: Control circuit terminals (voltage 0 to 10 V)
3: Control circuit terminals (current 4 to 20 mA)
4: Control circuit terminals (current 0 to 20 mA)
5: Pulse train
6: MEMOBUS communication (register No. 0002H)
7: Operator circuit terminals CN2(voltage 0 to 10 V)
8: Operator circuit terminals CN2(current 4 to 20 mA)
9: Communication card (optional)
0
n151
MEMOBUS
Timeover Detection Monitors
Transmission
Time between
Receiving the
Correct Data from
the PLC.
(Timeover: 2 s)
0: Timeover detection (coast to a stop)
1: Timeover detection (decelerates to a stop with
speed deceleration time 1)
2: Timeover detection (decelerates to a stop with
speed deceleration time 2)
3: Timeover detection (continuous operation, warning
display)
4: Timeover detection not provided
0
n152
MEMOBUS
Frequency
Reference and
Frequency
Monitor Unit
0: 0.1 Hz
1: 0.01 Hz
2: 30000/100 % (30000=max.output frequency)
3: 0.1 %
0
143
Constant
Name
Description
Factory
Setting
n153
MEMOBUS Slave
Address
Setting range: 0 to 32*
0
n154
MEMOBUS BPS
Selection
0: 2400 bps
1: 4800 bps
2: 9600 bps
3: 19200 bps
2
n155
MEMOBUS Parity
Selection
0: Even parity
1: Odd parity
2: No parity
2
n156
Transmission
Waiting Time
Setting range: 10 ms to 65 ms
Setting unit: 1 ms
n157
RTS Control
0: RTS control
1: No RTS control (RS-422A: 1-to-1 communication)
10 ms
0
* The slave does not respond to the command from the master when set to 0.
Monitoring run status from the PLC, setting/referencing of constants,
Fault Reset and multi-function input reference can be done regardless of
Run Command or frequency reference selection.
Multi-function input reference from the PLC becomes OR with input
commands from S1 to S7 multi-function input terminals.
† Message Format
For communications, the master (PLC) sends a
command to the slave (V7AZ) and the slave responds to it. The configuration for sending and receiving is as shown to the right. The length of the
data varies according to the contents of commands
(functions).
The interval between messages must be maintained at the following amount.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
PLC - V7AZ
V7AZ - PLC
Reference Message
Response Message
24 bits
n156 setting
24 bits
PLC - V7AZ
Reference Message
t (s)
10 ms or more
• Slave address: Inverter address (0 to 32)
Setting to 0 indicates simultaneous broadcasting. The
Inverter does not respond to the command from the master.
144
6 Programming Features
• Function code: Command codes (See below.)
Function
Code
Hexadecimal
Function
Reference Message
Response Message
Minimum
(Bytes)
Maximum
(Bytes)
Minimum
(Bytes)
Maximum
(Bytes)
03H
Reading holding
register contents
8
8
7
37
08H
Loop-back test
8
8
8
8
10H
Write in several
holding registers
11
41
8
8
• Data: Composes a series of data by combining holding register numbers
(test codes for loop-back numbers) and their data. Data length
depends on the contents of the command.
• Error check: CRC-16 (Calculate the value by the following method.)
1. The default value at calculation of CRC-16 is normally 0. In the
MEMOBUS system, change the default to 1 (all to 16-bit).
2. Calculate CRC-16 assuming that the loop address LSB is MSB and
the last data MSB is LSB.
3. Also calculate CRC-16 for a response message from the slave and
refer it to CRC-16 in the response message.
• Read Out Holding Register Contents (03H)
Reads out the contents of the specified number of continuous holding registers. The contents of each holding register is divided into
the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits. They become the data items in
the response message in numerical order.
145
Example:
Reads out the status signal, fault contents, data link status, and frequency reference from the V7AZ (slave 2).
Reference Message
Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address
02H
Slave address
02H
Slave address
02H
Function code
03H
Function code
03H
Function code
83H
Upper
00H
Number of data*
08H
Error code
Lower
20H
Upper
00H
Upper
00H
First
holding
register
Lower
65H
Lower
04H
Upper
00H
Lower
00H
Upper
00H
Start
number
Quantity
CRC-16
Upper
45H
Lower
F0H
(For error code 03H, refer
to page 157.)
Next
holding
register
Next
holding
register
Next
holding
register
CRC-16
Lower
00H
Upper
01H
Lower
F4H
Upper
AFH
Lower
82H
CRC-16
03H
Upper
F1H
Lower
31H
* Twice as much as the number of the reference message.
• Example of Loop-back Test (08H)
A reference message is returned as a response message without
being changed. This function is used to check communication
between the master and the slave. Any arbitrary values can be used
for test codes or data.
Example: Loop-back test of V7AZ (slave 1)
Reference Message
Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
Function code
08H
Function code
08H
Function code
89H
00H
Test
code
00H
Error code
01H
Test
code
Data
CRC-16
146
Upper
Lower
00H
Upper
A5H
Lower
37H
Upper
DAH
Lower
8DH
Data
CRC-16
Upper
Lower
00H
Upper
A5H
Lower
37H
Upper
DAH
Lower
8DH
CRC-16
01H
Upper
86H
Lower
50H
6 Programming Features
• Writing to Several Holding Registers (10H)
Specified data are written into the several specified holding registers
from the specified number, respectively. Written data must be
arranged in a reference message in the order of the holding register
numbers: from upper eight bits to lower eight bits.
Example:
Set forward run at frequency reference 60.0 Hz to slave 1 V7AZ from
the PLC.
Reference Message
Response Message
(at Normal Operation)
Response Message
(at Fault Occurrence)
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Slave address
01H
Function code
10H
Function code
10H
Function code
90H
Error code
Start
number
Quantity
Upper
00H
Lower
01H
Upper
00H
Lower
02H
Number of data*
04H
First
data
Upper
00H
Lower
01H
Next
data
Upper
02H
Lower
58H
CRC-16
Upper
63H
Lower
39H
Start
number
Quantity
CRC-16
Upper
00H
Lower
01H
Upper
00H
Lower
02H
Upper
10H
Lower
08H
CRC-16
02H
Upper
CDH
Lower
C1H
* Sets twice as large as the actual number.
147
Data
• Reference Data (available to read out/write in)
Register No.
Bit
Description
0000H Reserved
0001H
0
Run Command
1
Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
1: Run
0: Stop
2
External fault
1: Fault (EFO)
3
Fault Reset Command
1: Reset Command
4
Multi-function input reference 1 (Function selected by n050)
5
Multi-function input reference 2 (Function selected by n051)
6
Multi-function input reference 3 (Function selected by n052)
7
Multi-function input reference 4 (Function selected by n053)
8
Multi-function input reference 5 (Function selected by n054)
9
Multi-function input reference 6 (Function selected by n055)
A
Multi-function input reference 7 (Function selected by n056)
B-F
(Not used)
0002H
Frequency reference (unit: n152)
0003H
V/f gain (1000/100 %)
Setting range: 2.0 to 200.0 %
0004H- Reserved
0006H
Analog output terminal AM output setting
Setting range: 0 to 1100
0007H [0 to 11 V output/0 to 1100 (when Monitor Gain (n067) = 1.00)]
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 0 (analog monitor output) and
n066 is set to 8 (data output via communications).
0008H Reserved
0009H
0
Multi-function output reference 1
(Effective when n057=18)
(1: MA ON, 0: MA OFF)
1
Multi-function output reference 2
(Effective when n058=18)
(1: P1 ON, 0: P1 OFF)
2
Multi-function output reference 3
(Effective when n059=18)
(1: P2 ON, 0: P2 OFF)
3-F
148
(Not used)
6 Programming Features
Register No.
Bit
Description
000AH Pulse train output terminal AM output setting
Setting range: 0 to 14400
(0 to 14,400 Hz output/0 to 14400 [set in 1-Hz increments])
Note: Enabled only when n065 is set to 1 (pulse monitor output) and n150
is set to 50 (data output via communications).
000D
H
Digital Operator
000C
H
Digital Operator
PLC alarm/error setting
000BH
0
PLC alarm 1
1: PLC alarm 1 (PA1 flashes on Digital Operator)
1
PLC alarm 2
1: PLC alarm 2 (PA2 flashes on Digital Operator)
2
PLC error 1
1: PLC error 1 (PE1 displayed on
Digital Operator)
3
PLC error 2
1: PLC error 2 (PE2 displayed on
Digital Operator)
4-F
(Not used)
0-6
Digital Operator 7-segment LED 1st digit display data (ASCII)
7-D
Digital Operator 7-segment LED 2nd digit display data (ASCII)
E-F
(Not used)
0-6
Digital Operator 7-segment LED 3rd digit display data (ASCII)
7-D
Digital Operator 7-segment LED 4th digit display data (ASCII)
E-F
(Not used)
000EH
,
Reserved
001FH
Note: Write in “0” for an unused bit. Never write in data for the reserved register.
* Codes that cannot be expressed on 7-segment LEDs will be displayed as
"−".
149
• Simultaneous Broadcasting Data (available only for write in)
Register
No.
Bit
0001H
Description
0
Run Command
1
Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
1: Run
2
(Not used)
3
(Not used)
4
External fault
1: Fault (EFO)
5
Fault Reset Command
1: Fault Reset
6-F
0: Stop
(Not used)
Frequency reference 30000/100 % fixed unit
(Data is converted into 0.01 Hz inside the Inverter, and fractions
are rounded off.)
0002H
Bit signals not defined as the broadcast operation signals are used as
the local station data signals.
• Monitor Data (available only for read out)
Register
No.
Status signal
0020H
Bit
0
Run Command
1
Reverse Run Command 1: Reverse run 0: Forward run
1: Run
0: Stop
2
Inverter operation ready 1: Ready
3
Fault
4
Data setting error
1: Error
5
Multi-function output 1
(1: MA ON
0: MA OFF)
6
Multi-function output 2
(1: P1 ON
0: P1 OFF)
Multi-function output 3
(1: P2 ON
0: P2 OFF)
7
8-F
150
Description
(Not used)
0: Not ready
1: Fault
6 Programming Features
Register
No.
0022H
Fault description
Data link status
0021H
Bit
0
Overcurrent (OC)
1
Overvoltage (OV)
2
Inverter overload (OL2)
3
Inverter overheat (OH)
4
(Not used)
5
(Not used)
6
PID feedback loss (FbL)
7
External fault (EF, EFO), Emergency stop (STP)
8
Hardware fault (FXX)
9
Motor overload (OL1)
A
Overtorque detection (OL3)
B
Undertorque detection (UL3)
C
Power loss (UV1)
D
Control power fault (UV2)
E
MEMOBUS communications timeover (CE)
F
Operator connection fault (OPR)
0
Data write in
1
(Not used)
2
(Not used)
3
Upper/lower limit fault
4
5-F
0023H
Description
Consistency fault
(Not used)
Frequency reference (unit: n152)
0024H
Output frequency (unit: n152)
0025H0026H
(Not used)
0027H
Output current (10/1 A)
0028H
Output voltage reference (1/1 V)
151
Register
No.
Fault description
0029H
Bit
0
(Not used)
1
(Not used)
2
Input open phase (PF)
3
4-F
Sequence input status
002BH
Alarm description
0
002AH
Output open phase (LF)
(Not used)
Operation function stop (STP)
1
Sequence error (SER)
2
Simultaneous FWD/REV Run Commands (EF)
3
External Baseblock (BB)
4
Overtorque detection (OL3)
5
Cooling fan overheat (OH)
6
Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
7
Main circuit undervoltage (UV)
8
Cooling fan fault (FAN)
9
Communications fault (CE)
A
Option card communications error (BUS)
B
Undertorque (UL3)
C
Inverter overheat alert (OH3)
D
PID feedback loss (FBL)
E
Emergency stop (STP)
F
Communications waiting (CAL)
0
Terminal S1
1: Closed
0: Open
1
Terminal S2
1: Closed
0: Open
2
Terminal S3
1: Closed
0: Open
3
Terminal S4
1: Closed
0: Open
4
Terminal S5
1: Closed
0: Open
5
Terminal S6
1: Closed
0: Open
6
Terminal S7
1: Closed
0: Open
7-F
152
Description
(Not used)
6 Programming Features
Register
No.
002EH
Inverter status
Multi-function
output
002DH
Inverter
Status
002CH
Bit
Description
0
Run
1
Zero-speed
1: Run
1: Zero-speed
2
Frequency agreed
1: Agreed
3
Minor fault (Alarm is indicated)
4
Frequency detection 1
1: Output frequency ≤ (n095)
5
Frequency detection 2
1: Output frequency ≥ (n095)
6
Inverter operation ready
1: Ready
7
Undervoltage detection
1: Undervoltage detection
8
Baseblock
1: Inverter output baseblock
9
Frequency reference mode 1: Other than communications
0: Communications
A
Run Command mode
1: Other than communications
0: Communications
B
Overtorque detection
1: Detection or overtorque fault
C
Undertorque detection
fault
1: Detection or undertorque
D
Fault retry
E
Fault (Including MEMOBUS communications timeover)
1: Fault
F
MEMOBUS communications timeover 1: Timeover
0
MA
1: ON
0: OFF
1
P1
1: ON
0: OFF
2
P2
1: ON
0: OFF
3-F
0
1-F
(Not used)
Frequency reference loss 1: Frequency reference loss
(Not used)
002FH0030H
Reserved
0031H
Main circuit DC voltage (1/1 V)
0032H
Torque monitor (1/1 %; 100 %/Motor rated torque; with sign)
0033H0036H
(Not used)
0037H
Output Power (1/1 W: with sign)
153
Register
No.
0038H
Bit
Description
PID feedback value (100 % /Input equivalent to max. output frequency;
10/1 %; without sign)
0039H
PID input value (±100 %/±Max. output frequency; 10/1 %; with sign)
003AH
PID output value (±100 %/±Max. output frequency; 10/1 %; with sign)
003BH003CH
Reserved
003DH
Communications error
0
CRC error
1
Data length fault
2
(Not used)
3
Parity error
4
Overrun error
5
Framing error
6
Timeover
7
(Not used)
Reserved
0075H
Analog input terminal FR input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 10 V input,
0.0% to 100.0%/4 to 20 mA input,
0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 20 mA input)
0076H
Pulse train input terminal RP input value
(1 Hz/1)
0077H
Digital Operator potentiometer input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/Minimum to Maximum)
0078H
Digital Operator terminal CN2-1 (voltage input) input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/0 to 10 V input)
0079H
Digital Operator terminal CN2-2 (current input) input value
(0.0% to 100.0%/4 to 20 mA input)
007AH
154
Digital Operator key input
status
003EH00FFH
0
(Not used)
1
The DATA/ENTER key is being pressed.
2
The UP key is being pressed.
3
The DOWN key is being pressed.
4
The RUN key is being pressed.
5
The STOP/RESET key is being pressed.
6-F
Not used (always 0)
6 Programming Features
* Communications error contents are saved until Fault Reset is input.
(Reset is enabled during run.)
† Storing Constants [Enter Command] (can be written only.)
Register
No.
0900H
Name
Contents
Enter
Write in constant data to nonCommand volatile memory (EEPROM)
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
0000H to
FFFFH
-
When a constant is written from the PLC by communications, the constant is written to the constant data area on the RAM in the V7AZ. The
Enter Command is a command to write the constant data on the RAM to
the non-volatile memory in the V7AZ. This Enter Command is executed when data, regardlesss of the value, is written to register number
0900H. With the factory setting, an Enter Command is accepted only
while the Inverter is stopped. By changing constant n170, an Enter
Command can be accepted even while the Inverter is running.
CAUTION While the constant is being stored after an Enter Com-
mand was issued, response to the commands or data
input with the keys on the Digital Operator (JVOP-140)
becomes poor. Be sure to take some measures for an
emergency stop by using the external terminals (setting
the external terminal to Run Command priority, or setting the multi-function input terminal to external fault,
External Baseblock or emergency stop).
NOTE
Maximum number of writing times of the non-volatile memory used for V7AZ is 100,000; do not execute the Enter Command excessively.
When a constant is changed from the Digital Operator, the constant data
on the RAM is written to the non-volatile memory without the Enter
Command.
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
n170
Enter Command operation selection (MEMOBUS
communications)
-
Setting Factory
Range Setting
0, 1
0
155
n170
Setting
Description
0
Accepts the Enter Command (constant saving) while the
Inverter is stopped.
1
Always accepts the Enter Command (constant storing).
The new constant becomes valid even if the Enter Command is not input. If the Enter Command is not used, however, the value returns to the stored value when the power
supply is turned ON again.
Register number 0900H is used only for write-in. If this register is readout, a register number error (error code: 02H) occurs.
156
6 Programming Features
Error code
Error
Code
01H
Contents
Function code error
• Function code from PLC is other than 03H, 08H, or 10H.
Improper register number
02H
• No register numbers to be accessed have been registered.
• Enter Command “0900H” (an exclusive-use register for write-in)
was read out.
Improper quantity
03H
• The number of data items to be read or written-in is not in the
range between 1 and 16.
• The number of data items in a message is not the value obtained
by multiplying the quantity by two in the write-in mode.
Data setting error
21H
• A simple upper/lower limit error occurred with control data or constant write-in.
• A constant setting error occurred when a constant was written.
Write-in mode error
22H
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made during running.*
• Attempt to write in an Enter Command from PLC was made during running (n170=0).
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made during UV
occurrence.
• Attempt to write in an Enter Command from PLC was made during UV occurrence.
• Attempt to write in a constant other than n001=12, 13 (constant
initialization) from PLC was made during “F04” occurrence.
• Attempt to write in a constant from PLC was made while data
were being stored.
• Attempt to write in data exclusive for read-out from PLC was
made.
* Refer to the constants list for constants that can be changed during operation.
157
† Performing Self-test
V7AZ is provided with a function to perform self-diagnosis for operation check of the serial communication I/F circuit. This function is
called self-test. In the self-test, connect the sending terminal with the
receiving terminal in the communication section. It checks if the data
received by V7AZ is not being changed. It also checks if the data can
be received normally.
Carry out the self-test in the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the V7AZ power supply. Set constant n056 to 35 (selftest).
2. Turn OFF the V7AZ power supply.
3. Make the following wiring with the power supply turned OFF.
4. Turn the power ON.
S7
P1
S4
R+
P2
SC
PC
R-
S+
S-
(Note: Select NPN side for SW1.)
Normal operation: Operator displays frequency reference value.
Faulty operation: Operator displays
, fault signal is turned ON and
Inverter ready signal is turned OFF.
158
6 Programming Features
„ Using PID Control Mode
For details on the PID control settings, refer to the block diagram of the
Inverter’s internal PID control or the block diagram of the Operator analog speed reference.
† PID Control Selection (n128)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
n128
PID Control Selection
-
0 to 8
0
Setting
Function
0
Disabled.
1
Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control.
2
Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative control.
3
Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and deviation are subject to derivative control.
4
Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and feedback signal are subject to derivative control.
5
Enabled: Deviation is subject to derivative control.
6
Enabled: Feedback signal is subject to derivative control.
7
Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and deviation are subject to derivative control.
8
Enabled: Frequency reference + PID output, and feedback signal are subject to derivative control.
PID Output
Characteristics
Forward
Reverse
(Reverse the
PID output.)
159
Set one of the above values when using PID control.
The following table shows how to determine the target value and the
feedback value to be input when PID control is enabled.
Input
Target
Value
The currently selected
frequency reference
Feedback
Value
The frequency reference
that is set in the PID
Feedback Value Selection (n164)
n164 Setting
Condition
Determined by the Frequency Reference
Selection (n004).
When LOCAL mode is selected, the target
value is determined by the Frequency Reference Selection in Local Mode (n008).
When multi-step speed references are selected, the currently selected frequency
reference will be the target value.
-
Description
0
Control circuit terminal FR, Voltage: 0 to 10 V
1
Control circuit terminal FR, Current: 4 to 20 mA
2
Control circuit terminal FR, Current: 0 to 20 mA
3
Operator terminal, Voltage: 0 to 10 V
4
Operator terminal, Current: 4 to 20 mA
5
Pulse train
Note: 1. When selecting a frequency reference from the control circuit terminal FR as the target or feedback value, the V-I switch of SW2 on the
control circuit board must be selected depending on the input method
(current or voltage input).
2. Never use the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal
FR for both the target and feedback values. The frequency reference
for both the target value and the feedback value becomes the same.
Example:
When the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal FR,
with a voltage of 0 to 10 V, is selected as the target value and n004=2,
and when at the same time the frequency reference from the control
circuit terminal FR, with a current of 4 to 20 mA, is selected as the
feedback value and n164=1, the feedback value will be set as the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal FR with a voltage
of 0 to 10 V.
160
6 Programming Features
3. When using an analog signal (0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA) input to the CN2
terminal of the JVOP-140 Digital Operator as the target or feedback
value of PID control, do not use it as a multi-function analog input.
Constant n077 (Multi-function Analog Input Function) must be set to
0 (disabled in this case).
Proportional Gain (P), Integral Time (I), Derivative Time (D)
(n130, n131, n132)
Adjust the response of the PID control with the proportional gain (P),
integral time (I), and derivative time (D).
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n130
Proportional Gain (P)
0.1
0.0 to 25.0
1.0
n131
Integral Time (I)
0.1 s
0.0 to 360.0
1.0
n132
Derivative Time (D)
0.01 s
0.00 to 2.50
0.00
Optimize the responsiveness by adjusting the constants while operating an actual load (mechanical system). Any control (P, I, or D) that
is set to zero will not operate.
Upper Limit of Integral (I) Values (n134)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n134
Upper Limit of Integral Values
1%
0 to 100
100
Constant n134 prevents the calculated value of integral control from
exceeding a specific amount. There is normally no need to change the
setting.
Reduce the setting if there is a risk of load damage, or of the motor
going out of step by the Inverter’s response when the load suddenly
changes. If the setting is reduced too much, the target value and the
feedback value will not match.
Set this constant as a percentage of the maximum output frequency with
the maximum frequency as 100%.
161
PID Offset Adjustment (n133)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n133
PID Offset Adjustment
1%
-100 to 100
0
Constant n133 adjusts the PID control offset.
If both the target value and the feedback values are zero, adjust n133 so
that the Inverter output frequency is zero.
Primary Delay Time Constant for PID Output (n135)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n135
Primary Delay Time Constant
for PID Output
0.1 s
0.0 to 10.0
0.0
Constant n135 is the low-pass filter setting for PID control outputs.
There is normally no need to change the setting.
If the viscous friction of the mechanical system is high or if the rigidity
is low, causing the mechanical system to resonate, increase the setting
so that it is higher than the resonance frequency period.
PID Output Gain (n163)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n163
PID Output Gain
0.1
0.0 to 25.0
1.0
Constant n163 adjusts the PID control output gain.
PID Feedback Gain (n129)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n129
PID Feedback Gain
0.01
0.00 to 10.00
1.00
Constant n129 is the gain that adjusts the feedback value.
162
6 Programming Features
PID Feedback Loss Detection (n136, n137, n138)
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
-
0: No detection of PID
feedback loss
1: Detection of PID
feedback loss, operation continued: FbL
alarm
2: Detection of PID
feedback loss, output turned OFF:
Fault
0
0
n136
Selection for PID
Feedback Loss
Detection
n137
PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Level
1%
0 to 100
100%/Max. output frequency
n138
PID Feedback
Loss Detection
Time
0.1 s
0.0 to 25.5
1.0
PID Upper Limit
Sets the upper limit after PID control as a percentage of the maximum
output frequency.
Prohibition of PID Output
Zero limit occurs when the PID output is negative.
† Analog Position Control with Bi-directional PID Output(n145)
If the Bi-directional Function Selection (n145) is set to 1 (enabled), the
following functions will be enabled as bi-directional functions:
• PID Control Selection (n128) ≠ 0 (Enabled) and Bi-directional PID
Prohibit Input from Multi-function Input = OFF (Bi-directional PID
Function Enabled):
If the frequency reference is negative after PID control, the input
rotation direction command will be reversed, and the frequency reference will be converted to an absolute value. (If Reverse Run Prohibit
(n006) is set to 1, however, reverse operation will not be performed
and the frequency reference will be limited to 0 Hz.)
163
† Bidirectional Reference Control
PID Control Selection (n128) ≠ 0 (Enabled) and Bi-directional PID Prohibit Input from a Multi-function Input = ON (Bi-directional Range
Function Enabled):
If the frequency reference is from 0% to 50% after PID control, the
input rotation direction command will be reversed. If the reference is
from 50% to 100%, operation will be performed without reversing the
input rotation direction command.
The frequency reference at this time is shown in the following diagram.
(The diagram shows operation when a Forward Run Command is
input.) (If Reverse Run Prohibit (n006) is set to 1, however, reverse
operation will not be performed and the frequency reference will be limited to 0 Hz.)
Frequency reference
Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Reverse
0
Forward
50
100
Frequency (%) after PID control
100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Bi-directional Function Operation Table
PID Control Selection
(n128)
164
Bi-directional PID Prohibit Input
(S1 to S7)
OFF
ON
K0
(PID control enabled)
PID output is used
bi-directional
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
0
(PID control disabled)
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
Frequency reference
is used bi-directional
6 Programming Features
• If PID Control Selection (n128) is set to 0 (disabled), or a PID cancel
input using a multi-function input is ON (Bi-directional Range Function Enabled):
If the input frequency reference is from 0% to 50%, the input rotation
direction command will be reversed. If the reference is from 50% to
100%, operation will be performed without reversing the input rotation direction command.
The frequency reference at this time is shown in the following diagram. (The diagram shows operation when a Forward Run Command
is input.) (If Reverse Run Prohibit (n006) is set to 1, however, reverse
operation will not be performed and the frequency reference will be
limited to 0 Hz.)
Frequency reference
Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
Reverse
0
Forward
50
100
Frequency (%) after PID control
100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
PID Analog Output of the PID Feedback Value
If the Monitor Item Selection (n066) is set to 7, the PID feedback value
will be output as an analog value.
Analog output voltage (V)
10 V
0
Feedback value (%)
100% 100%/Maximum Output Frequency (n011)
165
166
Frequency
reference selection
n004
Pulse train
Operator (4 to 20 mA)
Operator (0 to 10 V)
External terminal (0 to 20mA)
External terminal (4 to 20mA)
External terminal (0 to 10V)
FREF1 (n024)
n008
n164
Adjustment
gain
n129
PID feedback
value selection
FJOG (n032)
100%
+
Z−1
n132
Z−1
n132
Z−1
+
+
n128=2, 4, 6, 8
110%
Z−1
Integral hold from
multi-function input
+
+
50%
100%
−100%
0
100%
100%
50%
+
−
1
n145
+
1
n135 +
Z−1
n128≠0
㬍1
n128 = 5, 6, 7, 8
+
+
n133
n163
200%
PID output gain
PID offset adjustment
㬍-1
−200%
PID output value
MNTR (U-18)
100%/FMAX
Output frequency
n128=0 or PID cancel by
the multi-function input
PID control
selection
n128=1, 2, 3, 4
Bi-directional PID prohibit
through multi-function input
PID primary delay time
constant compensation
with reminder
100%
ON
OFF
0
1
0
Bi-directional Selection
(Bi-directional range)
0% to 50%: Reverse of the input
rotation direction
50% to 100%: Input rotation direction
0
100%
Note: Z-1 cannot be cleared during run command input. Z-1
can be cleared during stop command input, or during PID
cancel by the multi-function input.
PID control selection
n128=2, 4, 6, 8
n128=1, 3, 5, 7
n134
+
(Bi-directional range)
0% to 50%: Reverse of
the input rotation
direction
50% to 100%: Input
rotation direction
(Bi-directional PID)
If negative data,
reverse of the input
rotation direction.
0%
Integral upper limit
−n134
Integral reset from
multi-function input
n128=1, 2, 5, 6
PID control
selection
n128 = 3, 4, 7, 8
+
+
Derivative time (D)
+
−
PID control
selection
n128=1, 3, 5, 7
Derivative time (D)
+
−
+
1
n131 +
Integral time (I)
compensation
with reminder
Feedback value
MNTR (U-16)
100%/FMAX
n130
PID INPUT
MNTR (U-17)
100%/FMAX
−
Proportional
gain
Multi-step speed reference
Remote/Local
FREF2 (n025)
FREF3 (n026)
FREF4 (n027)
FREF5 (n028)
FREF6 (n029)
FREF7 (n030)
FREF8 (n031)
FREF9 (n120)
FREF10 (n121)
FREF11 (n122)
FREF12 (n123)
FREF13 (n124)
FREF14 (n125)
FREF15 (n126)
FREF16 (n127)
Operator potentiometer
Operator (4 to 20 mA)
Operator (0 to 10 V)
Communications
Pulse train
External terminal (0 to 20 mA)
External terminal (4 to 20 mA)
External terminal (0 to 10 V)
FREF1 (n024)
Operator potentiometer
V7AZ PID Control Block Diagram
GND
Pin 3
of CN2
IIN
Pin 2
of CN2
4 to 20 mA
VIN
Pin 1
of CN2
0 to 10 V
Inverter
ADCH1
0V
A/D converter GND
A/D
conversion
ADCH2
RS-232C MEMOBUS communications
(9600 bps)
A/D
conversion
Converts A/D (value)
into Hz
n011
3FFH
Max. output frequency
Converts A/D (value)
into Hz
n011
3FFH
RS-232C MEMOBUS communications
Max. output frequency
(9600 bps)
Digital Operator
(JVOP-140)
Compensation with
reminder
1
n073
Primary delay
time constant
Compensation with
reminder
1
n070
Primary delay
time constant
Z
-1
Z-1
n072
Bias
n069
Bias
n071
Gain
Gain
n068
0%
0%
Max. output frequency
n011
n071<0
n071≥0
n011
Max. output frequency
n068<0
n068≥0
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram
Operator Analog Speed Reference Block Diagram
110%
110%
Fref
Fref
6 Programming Features
167
„ Using Constant Copy Function
† Constant Copy Function
The V7AZ standard JVOP-140 Digital Operator can store constants for
one Inverter. A backup power supply is not necessary because
EEPROM is used.
The constant copy function is possible only for the Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control). However, some constants may not be copied. It is also impossible to copy constants between V7AZ and VS mini
J7 Inverters.
Prohibiting reading constants from the Inverter can be set in n177. The
constant data cannot be changed when this constant is set.
If an alarm occurs when copying constants, PRGM will flash and copying will continue.
To remove the Digital Operator from the Inverter, turn OFF
NOTE
the input power supply of the Inverter and confirm that the
display on the Digital Operator has turned OFF. If the Digital
Operator is removed while the power is ON, the Inverter may
be damaged.
Constant Copy Function Selection (n176)
Depending on the setting of n176 (Constant Copy Function Selection),
the following functions can be used.
1. Reading all the constants from the Inverter (READ) and storing
them in EEPROM in the Digital Operator
2. Copying the constants stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter
(COPY)
3. Verifying that the constants in the Digital Operator and the constants
in the Inverter are the same (VERIFY)
4. Displaying the maximum applicable motor capacity and the voltage
class of the Inverter for which constants are stored in the Digital
Operator
5. Displaying the software number of the Inverter for which constants
are stored in the Digital Operator
168
6 Programming Features
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
n176
Constant
Copy Function Selection
-
rdy: Ready
rEd: Read
CPy: Copy
vFy: Verify
vA: Inverter capacity display
Sno: Software No. display
rdy
Prohibiting Constant Read Selection (n177)
Select this function to prevent accidentally overwriting the constants
stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator. Reading is not possible
when this constant is set to 0.
The constant data stored in the Digital Operator are safe from accidental
overwriting.
If reading is attempted while this constant is set to 0, PrE will flash.
Press DSPL or ENTER and return to the constant number display.
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
n177
Constant Read
Selection Prohibit
-
Setting Range
0: Read prohibited
1: Read allowed
Factory
Setting
0
169
† READ Function
Reads out the constants in batch from the Inverter and stores them in
EEPROM inside the Digital Operator. When the read-out is executed,
the previously stored constants data in the EEPROM are cleared and
replaced with the newly entered constants.
Example: Storing Constants from Inverter in EEPROM in Operator
Explanation
• Enable the setting of constants n001 to
n179.
• Press DSPL
Operator Display
and
PRGM will light.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
4 by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Set Constant
Read Prohibited
Selection
(n177) to readenabled. *1
• Change the constant No.
to n177 by pressing the
or key.
(Lit)
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
1 by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
170
6 Programming Features
Explanation
• Execute readout (READ)
using the Constant Copy
Function Selection (n176).
Operator Display
• Change the constant
number by pressing the
or key.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
rEd by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
• Press DSPL
or
ENTER .
• Set Constant
Read Prohibited
Selection
(n177) to readdisabled.*2
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Flashes while executing the read.)
↓
(End is displayed after the
read has been completed.)
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Change the constant
number to n177 by
pressing the or key.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
0 by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(Lit)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
* 1. When reading is enabled (n177=1), this setting is not necessary.
* 2. This setting is not necessary unless read-prohibition is selected.
171
† COPY Function
This function writes the constants stored inside the Digital Operator in
batch to the Inverter. Write-in is possible only for Inverters with the
same product series, power supply specifications, and control mode (V/
f control or vector control).
Therefore, writing from 200 V Class to 400 V Class Inverters (or vice
versa), from V/f control mode to vector control mode Inverters (or vice
versa), or from V7AZ to VS mini J7 Inverters is not possible.
The Constant Copy Function Selection (n176), Constant Read Selection
Prohibit (n177), Fault History (n178), Software Version No. (n179), and
hold output frequency are not written. vAE will appear (flashing) if the
capacities of the Inverters differ.
Press ENTER to continue writing (the COPY function).
Press STOP/RESET to stop the COPY function.
The following constants are not written if the Inverter capacities differ.
Constant No.
Constant No.
Name
V/f Settings
n108
Motor Leakage Inductance
n036
Motor Rated Current
n109
Torque Compensation
Voltage Limiter
n080
Carrier Frequency Selection
n110
Motor No-load Current
n105
Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
n140
Energy-saving Coefficient K2
n106
Motor Rated Slip
n158
Motor Code
n107
Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance
n011 to n017
Name
Constants added with software version upgrades will not be written
between V7AZ Inverters without the additional constants and V7AZ
Inverters with the additional constants.
For this reason, the settings for the additional constants will not be
changed by the copy operation.
172
6 Programming Features
Example: Writing Constants from EEPROM in Operator to Inverter
Explanation
• Enable the settings for constants n001 to
n179.
• Press DSPL
Operator Display
and
PRGM will light.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute writein (COPY)
using the Constant Copy
Function
Selection
(n176).
• Change the constant No.
to n176 by pressing the
or key.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
CPy by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Flashes while executing the
copy.)
↓
• Press DSPL
or
(End is displayed after the
copy has been completed.)
ENTER .
(The constant number is displayed.)
A setting range check and matching check for the written constants are
executed after the constants are written from the Digital Operator to the
Inverter. If a constant error is found, the written constants are discarded
and the constants stored before writing are restored.
When a setting range error is found, the constant number where an error
occurs is indicated by flashing.
When an inconsistency in the settings is found,
(†: a number)
is indicated by flashing.
173
† VERIFY Function
This function compares the constants stored in the Digital Operator with
the constant in the Inverter. Verification is possible only for the Inverters with same product series, power supply specifications, and control
mode (V/f control or vector control).
When the constants stored in the Digital Operator are the same as those
in the Inverter, vFy will flash, and then End will be displayed.
When the constants are not the same, the unmatched constant number
will be displayed.
Constants added with software version upgrades will be displayed when
VERIFY is performed for V7AZ Inverters without the additional constants and V7AZ Inverters with the additional constants.
174
6 Programming Features
Example: Comparing Constants Stored in EEPROM in Operator with
Constants in Inverter
Explanation
• Enable the settings for constants n001 to
n179.
Operator Display
• Press DSPL
and
PRGM will light.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
4 by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute VERIFY by Constant
Copy Function
Selection (n176).
• Change the constant
number to n176 by
pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER to display the set value.
• Change the set value to
vFy by pressing the
or key.
• Press ENTER .
• Display the
unmatched
constant number
• Display the
constant value in
the Inverter.
• Display the constant value in the
Digital Operator.
• Continue the
execution of
VERIFY.
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Flashes while executing the verification.)
(Flashes)
(When n011 is different.)
• Press ENTER .
(Flashes)
• Press ENTER .
(Flashes)
• Press the
key.
(Flashes while executing the
verification.)
↓
(End is displayed when the
verification has been completed.)
• Press DSPL
ENTER .
or
(The constant number is
displayed.)
175
While a constant number that is not the same is displayed or a constant
value is displayed, press STOP/RESET to interrupt the execution of the
verification. End will be displayed. Press DSPL or ENTER to return
to the constant number display.
† Inverter Capacity Display
The voltage class and maximum applicable motor capacity for which
constants are stored in the Digital Operator are displayed.
Example: Displaying Voltage Class and Maximum Applicable Motor
Capacity for Inverter whose Constants are in EEPROM in
Operator
Explanation
• Enable the
setting for
constants
n001 to
n179.
• Press DSPL
Operator Display
and
PRGM will light.
• Press ENTER to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
by pressing the or
key.
• Press ENTER .
(May be a different constant number)
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
(Flashes)
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Execute
Inverter
Capacity
Display
(vA) using
the Constant Copy
Function
Selection
(n176).
• Change the constant number to n176 by pressing the
or key.
• Press ENTER to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to vA
by pressing the or
key.
176
(Lit)
(Lit) (For 20P7)*
• Press ENTER .
• Press DSPL
ENTER .
(Lit)
or
(The constant number is displayed.)
6 Programming Features
* The following figure shows the Inverter Capacity Display.
Voltage Class
B
2
Single-phase 200 V
Three-phase 200 V
4
Three-phase 400 V
Max. Applicable Motor Capacity
0.1
0.1 kW
0.2
0.25 kW
0.4
0.55 kW
0.7
1.5
2.2
1.1 kW
3.0
3.0 kW
3.7
4.0 kW
5.5
7.5
5.5 kW
1.5 kW
2.2 kW
7.5 kW
177
† Software No. Display
The software number of the Inverter for which constants are stored in
the Digital Operator is displayed.
Example: Displaying Software No. of Inverter for which Constants are
Stored in EEPROM in Digital Operator
Explanation
Operator Display
• Enable the
setting for
constants
n001 to
n179.
• Press DSPL
• Execute
Software
No. Display (Sno)*
using the
Constant
Copy Function Selection (n176).
• Change the constant number to n176 by pressing the
or key.
and
(May be a different constant number)
PRGM will light.
• Press ENTER to display
(Lit)
(May be a different set value.)
the set value.
• Change the set value to 4
(Flashes)
by pressing the or key.
• Press ENTER .
(Lit for one second.)
↓
(The constant number is displayed.)
• Press ENTER to display
the set value.
• Change the set value to Sno
by pressing the or key.
• Press ENTER .
• Press DSPL
or ENTER .
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Lit)
(Software version: for example
VSP010013)
(The constant number is displayed.)
* Displays the lower 4 digits of the software version.
178
6 Programming Features
† Display List
Operator
Display
Description
Corrective Action
Lit: Constant copy function selection enabled.
-
Lit: READ selected.
Flashes: READ under execution.
-
Lit: Writing (COPY) selected.
Flashes: Writing (COPY) under execution.
-
Lit: VERIFY selected.
Flashes: VERIFY under execution.
-
Lit: Inverter capacity display selected.
-
Lit: Software No. display selected.
-
Lit: READ, COPY (writing), VERIFY completed.
-
Flashes: Attempt made to execute READ
while Constant Read Selection Prohibit (n177) is set to 0.
Confirm the necessity to execute READ, then
set Constant Read Selection Prohibit (n177) to
1 to execute READ.
Flashes: The constant could not be read properly for READ operation. Or, a main
circuit low voltage is detected during
READ operation.
Confirm that the main circuit power supply
voltage is correct, then re-execute READ.
Flashes: A checksum error occurred in the
constant data stored in the Digital
Operator.
The constants stored in the Digital Operator
cannot be used.
Re-execute READ to store the constants in
the Digital Operator.
Flashes: The password for the connected Inverter and that for the constant data
stored in the Digital Operator disagree.
Example: Writing (COPY) from V7AZ to VS
mini J7
Check if the Inverters are the same product
series.
Flashes: No constant data stored in the Digital
Operator.
Execute READ.
Flashes: Attempt made to execute writing
(COPY) or VERIFY between different
voltage classes or different control
modes.
Check each voltage class and control mode.
Flashes: A main circuit low voltage was detected during writing (COPY) operation.
Confirm that the main circuit power supply
voltage is correct, then re-execute writing
(COPY).
Lit: A checksum error occurred in the constant
data stored in the Inverter.
Initialize the constants. If an error occurs
again, replace the Inverter due to a failure of
constant memory element (EEPROM) in the
Inverter.
Flashes: Attempt made to execute COPY or
VERIFY between different Inverters
or different capacities.
Press ENTER to continue the execution of
COPY or VERIFY. Press STOP to interrupt
the execution of COPY or VERIFY.
179
Operator
Display
Description
Corrective Action
Flashes: A communications error occurred be- Check the connection between the Inverter
tween the Inverter and the Digital Op- and Digital Operator.
erator.
If a communications error occurs during the
READ operation or writing (COPY) operation,
always re-execute the READ or COPY.
Note: While rEd, CPy, or vFy is flashing, key input on the Digital Operator is
disabled. While rEd, CPy and vFy are not flashing, pressing DSPL or
ENTER redisplays the constant number.
180
6 Programming Features
„ Customer Specific Display Scaling
Constants and Monitor Displays for Which Selection of Unit
Function is Valid
Item
Contents
Frequency reference constants
Frequency References 1 to 8 (Constants n024 to n031)
Jog Frequency Reference (Constant n032)
Frequency References 9 to 16 (Constants n120 to n127)
Monitor display
Frequency Reference Display (FREF)
Output Frequency Display (FOUT)
Frequency Reference Display (U-01)
Output Frequency Display (U-02)
Setting/Displaying Unit Selection for Frequency Reference
(n035)
The frequency reference, output frequency, and the numeric data of frequency reference constants can be displayed in %, rpm, or m/min
according to the set value of constant n035.
Constant
No.
Constant Name
n035
Setting/Displaying Unit Selection for
Frequency Reference
Description
0: Units of 0.01 Hz (less than
100 Hz) 0.1 Hz (100 Hz and
more)
1: Units of 0.1%
2 to 39: Units of rpm (set the
number of motor poles)
40 to 3999: Any unit
Factory
Setting
0
181
n035 Settings
Setting
0
1
Description
• Setting unit: 0.01 Hz (below 100 Hz), 0.1 Hz (above 100 Hz )
• Setting in units of 0.1%: 100.0% at Fmax (n011)
2 to 39
• Setting in units of 1 rpm: (Set number of motor poles in n035)
Display = 120 x frequency value [Hz] / number of motor poles
• Limits: 9999 rpm and rpm x n035 / 120 ≤ 400 Hz
40 to
3999
• Set the display value at 100% of frequency reference (set
value of Fmax (n011)) at the 1st to 4th digits of n035.
The 4th digit of n035, sets the position of decimal point.
The 1st to 3rd digits of n035, sets the display value at 100%
frequency reference (excluding decimal point).
4th digit Position of decimal point
0
† † †
1
† †. †
2
†. † †
3
0. † † †
Example: To display 20.0 at 100% of frequency reference, set
n035 to 1200.
• Limits: max. Display value 999 (3 lower digits of n035)
182
6 Programming Features
Note: 1. The frequency reference constants and monitor display data for
which this selection of the unit is valid are stored in the Inverter in
units of Hz.
The units are converted as shown below:
Setting/Display
Constant n035
Frequency reference constants
Data for monitor display
Display
Each unit
system
Units of Hz
Setting
2. The upper limit for each unit is the value with decimal places below
the significant digits truncated.
Example: Where the upper limit for the unit Hz is as follows for
60.00 Hz and n035 = 39:
120 × 60.00 Hz ÷ 39 = 184.6, thus 184 rpm is displayed as the upper
limit.
For displays other than for the upper limit, the decimal places below
the significant digits are rounded off.
3. When verifying constants for the copy function, frequency reference
constants (units of Hz) are used.
„ Selecting Processing for Frequency Reference
Loss (n064)
Use this setting to select the processing performed if the level of the frequency reference signal from the control circuit terminals suddenly
drops.
n064
Setting
Description
0
Processing for frequency reference loss disabled.
1*
Processing for frequency reference loss enabled.
* Detected in REMOTE mode (Drive mode) when analog reference (except
potentiometer on Digital Operator) or pulse train reference is selected in the
Frequency Reference Selection (n004).
Processing Method When 1 is Selected
If the level of the frequency reference signal drops by 90 % within 400
ms, operation continues at 80 % of the signal level before the level drop.
183
„ Input/Output Open-phase Detection
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting Range
Factory
Setting
n166
Input
Open-phase
Detection Level
1%
0 to 100 %*1
400.0 V/100 %
(200 V Class)
800.0 V/100 %
(400 V Class)
0%
n167
Input
Open-phase
Detection Time
1s
0 to 255 s*2
0s
n168
Output
Open-phase
Detection Level
1%
0 to 100 %*1
Inverter’s rated output current/100 %
0%
n169
Output
Open-phase
Detection Time
0.1 s 0.0 to 2.0 s*2
0.0 s
* 1. Not detected when set to 0 %.
* 2. Not detected when set to 0.0 s.
The recommended settings for input open-phase detection are
n166=7 % and n167=10 s.
(Open-phase cannot be detected correctly depending on the load status.)
The recommended settings for output open-phase detection are
n168=5 % and n169=0.2 s.
184
6 Programming Features
„ Undertorque Detection
An alarm signal can be output to a multi-function output terminal (MA,
MB, P1 or P2) when the load on the machine side suddenly becomes
lighter (i.e., when an undertorque occurs).
To output an undertorque detection signal, set the output terminal function selection in n057, n058, or n059 to 8 (undertorque detected, NO
contact) or 9 (undertorque detected, NC contact).
Motor Current
n118
Multi-function Output
Terminal (Undertorque
Detection Signal)
MA, MB, P1, P2
Time
ON
ON
n119
n119
* Undertorque detection release width (hysteresis) is set at approx. 5 % of the
Inverter’s rated current.
Undertorque Detection Function Selection 1 (n117)
Setting
Description
0
Undertorque detection not provided.
1
Detected during constant-speed running. Operation continues
after detection.
2
Detected during constant-speed running. Operation stops.
3
Detected during running. Operation continues after detection.
4
Detected during running. Operation stops.
1. To detect undertorques during acceleration, set to 3 or 4.
2. To continue operation after undertorque detection, set to 1 or 3.
During detection, the operation displays the “UL3” alarm (flashing).
3. To halt the Inverter by a fault at undertorque detection, set to 2 or 4.
At detection, the Operation displays the “UL3” fault (continuously
lit).
185
Undertorque Detection Level (n118)
Sets the undertorque detection current level in units of 1 %. (Inverter
rated current=100 %) When detected by torque is selected, motor rated
torque becomes 100 %.
Factory setting=10 %
Undertorque Detection Time (n119)
If the time for which the motor current is less than the undertorque
detection level (n118) is longer than the undertorque detection time
(n119), the undertorque detection function operates.
Factory setting=0.1 s
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
(n097)
When vector control mode is selected, it is possible to select whether
overtorque/undertorque detection is performed by output current or output torque.
When V/f control mode is selected, the n097 setting becomes invalid,
and overtorque/undertorque is detected by output current.
Setting
186
Description
0
Overtorque/undertorque detected by output torque.
1
Overtorque/undertorque detected by output current.
6 Programming Features
„ Using Inverter for Elevating Machines
CAUTION If using an Inverter with an elevator, take safety mea-
sures on the elevator to prevent the elevator from dropping.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
When using the V7AZ for elevating machines such as elevators and
cranes, make sure that the brake holds and observe the following precautions for safe operation.
† Brake ON/OFF Sequence
• For the holding brake’s ON/OFF sequence, use the following Inverter
output signals according to the set control mode.
NOTE
Do not use “Running (Set value: 1)” for the holding brake’s
ON/OFF interlock signal.
Brake ON/OFF Signals
Control
Mode
V/f
Control*1
(n002=0)
Signal Name
Frequency
detection 1
Constant*2
n058=4
Brake ON/OFF Level
Adjustment
Signal Name
Frequency
detection
level
Constant
n095=2.50 Hz
to 4.00 Hz*3
* 1. For Vector control (n002=1), use the same brake ON/OFF sequence with
the same signals as for V/f control.
* 2. Shows the setting when a multi-function photocoupler output terminal
(P1-PC) is used.
* 3. Usually, make the following settings for the frequency detection (n095):
For V/f control: Motor rated slip frequency +1 Hz
For Vector control: 2.5 Hz to 3.0 Hz
If the set value is too low, the motor torque is insufficient and the load
may shift when the brake is applied. Be sure to set n095 to a value larger
than that of the Minimum Output Frequency (n016) and larger than that
of the braker releasing width shown in the following figure. If the set
value is too large, the motor may not run smoothly when it starts running.
187
Releasing Width -2 Hz
Output
Frequency
n095
Time
ON
Frequency
Detection
Level 1
Up
Down
High/Low
OFF
• Sequence Circuit Configuration and Timing Chart Examples
For the AC sequence cirHolding Brake
cuit, connect the signal
Inverter V7AZ
Auxiliary Relay Coil
between P1 and PC to the
+24V
Fault Contacts MA
sequence circuit with a
MB
Sequence
S1
BR
Circuit
relay.
(Forward Run)
MC
S2
Energizes the brake
Design the sequence so
(Reverse Run)
when ON.
S6
that the holding brake con(30 VDC 1 A or less.)
(Multi-step Speed Reference 2) P1
SC
tact is open when the
Frequency
PC
sequence operation condiDetection1
tions are satisfied and the
contact between P1 and PC
is closed (ON).
Make sure that the holding
brake contact is closed
when the emergency stop
signal or Inverter fault
contact output signal is
ON.
• For V/f Control and Vector Control
S1-SC
UP
Input
S6-SC
Output
188
High Speed/
Low Speed
Output Frequency
0
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
n026
n095
Frequency
Detection 1
ON
P1-PC (n058=4)
Holding Brake
CLOSED OPEN
Operation
n024 (Enabled when n004=1)
n095
Time
DC Injection Brake
OFF
CLOSED
6 Programming Features
• For a variable speed operation by an analog signal, set the Frequency
Reference Selection (n004) to a value from 2 to 4.
† Stall Prevention during Deceleration
If connecting a braking resistor to discharge regenerative energy, be
sure to set the stall prevention during deceleration (n092) to 1.
If the stall prevention during deceleration (n092) is set to the
NOTE factory setting 0 (Enabled), the motor may not stop within the
specified decelerating time.
The Stall Prevention during Acceleration (n093) and the Stall
Prevention Level during Running (n094) should be set to
their factory settings to enable these functions.
† Settings for V/f Pattern and Motor Constants
To set the control mode and the V/f pattern, refer to the instruction manual. If the Vector control method is used, also set the motor constants.
† Momentary Power Loss Restart and Fault Restart
Do not use the momentary power loss restart and fault restart functions
in applications for elevating machines. Make sure that n081=0 and
n082=0. If these functions are used, the motor coasts to a stop with the
brake contact open when a momentary power loss or fault occurs during
operation, possibly resulting in serious accidents.
† I/O Open-phase Protection and Overtorque Detection
The I/O open-phase protection is only available for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW
models.
To prevent the machine from falling when the motor is open-phase or in
a similar situation, enable the I/O open-phase protection (n166 to n169)
and the overtorque detection (n096 to n099). At the factory, these constants are set so that these functions are disabled.
Also, take safety measures such as protection against falls on the
machine.
† Carrier Frequency
Set the carrier frequency selection (n080) to 5 kHz or more (n080: 2 to 4
or 12) to secure the motor torque even if an overcurrent occurs (the current is limited).
189
† External Baseblock Signal
If the External Baseblock Command (settings 12 and 13 of n050 to
n056) is input while the motor is running, the motor will immediately
coast to a stop. Do not input the External Baseblock Command while
the motor is running unless necessary.
If using the External Baseblock Command for an emergency stop or to
start run of an interlock, make sure that the holding brake operates.
If the External Baseblock Command is input and immediately reset, the
Inverter does not output voltage during the minimum baseblock time,
which is 0.5 to 0.7 seconds depending on the Inverter capacity. Do not
use the External Baseblock Command in an application where the motor
is frequently stopped and started.
† Acceleration/Deceleration Time
If the delay time for the holding brake’s mechanical operation is not
taken into consideration and the acceleration/deceleration time on the
Inverter side is set to a time that is too short, an overcurrent or wear on
the brakes may occur at starting or the load will shift at stopping
because the holding brake does not operate on time. If so, use the Scurve characteristic function or lengthen the acceleration/deceleration
time to tune the timing for the holding brake.
† Contactor on the Inverter’s Output-side
Do not install a contactor between the Inverter and the motor.
If a contactor must be installed because of local electrical codes or regulations or to operate motors with an Inverter, excluding emergencies,
open or close the contactor only where the holding brake is fully closed
and the Inverter is in baseblock status with the baseblock signal ON.
If the contactor is opened or closed while the Inverter is controlling the
motor or DC injection braking, surge voltage or a current from the
motor by full-voltage starting may cause an Inverter fault.
When a contactor is installed between the Inverter and the motor, enable
the I/O open-phase protection (n166 to n169).
For more information on using Inverters exclusively for elevators or cranes,
contact your OMRON representatives or the nearest OMRON sales office.
190
6 Programming Features
„ Using MECHATROLINK-II Communications
MECHATROLINK-II can be used with the SI-T/V7 option unit.
For details, refer to V7AZ OPTION UNIT MECHATROLINK COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE UNIT INSTRUCTIONS (TOBPC73060003).
The following constants are used for communications error settings for
SI-T/V7.
Constant
No.
Name
Unit
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
n063
Watchdog Error Operation
Selection (For SI-T/V7)
-
0 to 4
0
n114
Number of Transmission
Cycle Error Detection
(For SI-T/V7)
-
2 to 10
2
n063
Setting
Description
0
Coast to a stop
1
Deceleration to a stop using Deceleration Time 1 in
n020.
2
Deceleration to a stop using Deceleration Time 2 in
n022.
3
Continuous operation (Alarm)
4
Continuous operation (Alarm, no fault)
191
7 Maintenance and Inspection
WARNING • Never touch high-voltage terminals on the Inverter.
Failure to observe this warning may result in an
electrical shock.
• Disconnect all power before performing maintenance or inspection, and then wait at least one
minute after the power supply is disconnected. Confirm that all indicators are OFF before proceeding.
If the indicators are not OFF, the capacitors are still
charged and can be dangerous.
• Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part
of the V7AZ.
The Inverter is an electronic device that uses semiconductors, and is thus vulnerable to high voltage.
• Only authorized personnel should be permitted to
perform maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement.
(Remove all metal objects (watches, bracelets, etc.)
before starting work.)
(Use tools which are insulated against electrical
shock.)
Failure to observe these warnings may result in an
electric shock.
CAUTION
192
• The control PCB employs CMOS ICs.
Do not touch the CMOS elements.
They are easily damaged by static electricity.
• Do not connect or disconnect wires, connectors, or
the cooling fan while power is applied to the circuit.
Failure to observe this caution may result in injury.
7 Maintenance and Inspection
„ Periodic Inspection
Periodically inspect the Inverter as described in the following table to
prevent accidents and to ensure high performance with high reliability.
Location to
Check
Check for
Solution
Terminals, Inverter mounting
screws, etc.
Improper seating or
loose connections in
hardware.
Properly seat and tighten
hardware.
Heatsinks
Buildup of dust, dirt, and
debris
Blow with dry compressed air
at a pressure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa (4 to 6 kg/cm2).
Printed circuit
boards
Accumulation of conductive material or oil mist
Blow with dry compressed air
at a pressure of 39.2 × 104 to
58.8 × 104 Pa (4 to 6 kg/cm2).
If dust or oil cannot be removed, replace the Inverter.
Power elements
and smoothing
capacitor
Abnormal odor or discoloration
Replace the Inverter.
Cooling fan
Abnormal noise or vibration
Cumulative operation
time exceeding 20,000
hours
Replace the cooling fan.
193
„ Part Replacement
Inverter’s maintenance periods are given below. Keep them as guidelines.
Part Replacement Guidelines
Part
Cooling fan
Smoothing capacitor
Standard
Replacement
Period
2 to 3 years
Replacement Method
Replace with new part.
5 years
Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
-
Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Fuses
10 years
Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Aluminum capacitors on PCBs
5 years
Replace the Inverter unit with a new
one.(Determine need by inspection.)
Breaker relays
Note: Usage conditions are as follows:
• Ambient temperature: Yearly average of 30°C
• Load factor: 80% max.
• Operating rate: 12 hours max. per day
194
7 Maintenance and Inspection
† Replacement of Cooling Fan
Inverters of
200 V class, single-phase, 0.1 to 0.55, 2.2 and 4.0 kW,
200 V class, three-phase, 0.1 to 1.1 and 4.0 to 5.5 kW,
400 V class, three-phase, 3.0 to 7.5 kW:
1. Removal
1. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and then pull them in direction
2 to remove the fan cover from
the Inverter.
2. Pull the wiring in direction 3
from the fan cover rear face,
and remove the protective tube
and connector.
3. Open the left and right sides of
the fan cover to remove the
cooling fan from the cover.
2. Mounting
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction
of the cooling fan must be on
the opposite side to the cover.
2. Connect the connector and
mount the protective tube
firmly. Mount the connector
joint section on the fan cover
rear face.
3
Airflow Direction
3. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.
195
Inverters of
200 V class single-phase, 1.5 and 2.2 kW,
200 V class three-phase, 1.1 and 1.5 kW,
400 V class three-phase, 0.37 to 2.2 kW:
1. Removal
1. Remove the front cover and
terminal cover, and then
remove the cooling fan connector (CN10).
2. Press the right and left catches
on the fan cover in direction 1,
and pull the fan cover in direction 2 to remove it from the
Inverter. Pull out the wiring
from the cable lead-in hole at
the bottom of the plastic case.
3. Open the right and left sides of
the fan cover to remove the
cover from the cooling fan.
Cooling
Fan Wire
2. Mounting
1. Mount the cooling fan on the
fan cover. The arrow mark to
indicate the airflow direction
must be opposite to the cover.
2. Mount the fan cover on the
Inverter. Always mount the
right and left catches on the
fan cover on the heatsinks.
Thread in the wiring from the
cable lead-in hole at the bottom of the plastic case to the
inside of the Inverter.
3. Connect the wiring to the
cooling fan connector (CN10)
and mount the front cover and
the terminal cover.
196
1
2
1
Airflow Direction
8 Fault Diagnosis
8 Fault Diagnosis
„ Protective and Diagnostic Functions
This section describes the alarm and fault displays, the fault conditions,
and the corrective actions to be taken if the V7AZ
malfunctions.
Inverter alarms are classified into alarm display and fault display.
Alarm display:When a minor fault occurs in the Inverter, the Digital
Operator flashes the display. In this case, the operation
is continued, and restored automatically as soon as the
cause is removed. Multi-function output can output the
minor fault status to external devices.
Fault display: When a major fault occurs in the Inverter, the protective
function operates, and the Digital Operator lights the display and shuts off the output to stop the Inverter. The
fault can be output as a fault output to the external
devices by multi-function output.
To reset the fault, turn ON the reset signal with the Run Command OFF
or cycle the power after taking the corrective action.
* Selecting "always ON" mode at fan operation selection, the power
must be cycled to release the alarm display.
† Corrective Actions of Models with Blank Cover
1. Input fault reset or cycle the power supply OFF and ON.
2. When a fault cannot be corrected:
(1) Turn the power supply OFF and check the wiring and external circuit
(sequence).
(2) Turn the power supply OFF and replace the blank cover with the Digital Operator to display faults. The faults are displayed after turning
the power ON.
197
† Corrective Actions of Models with Digital Operator
: ON
: Flashing
: OFF
Alarm Display
Alarm Displays and Meaning
Alarm Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact output is not activated.
Flashing
Flashing
Description
UV (Main circuit low volt- Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
age)
Main circuit DC voltage
dropped below the low-voltage detection level while the
Inverter output is OFF.
200 V: Main circuit DC voltage drops below approx. 200 V (160 V for
single-phase).
400 V: Main circuit DC voltage dropped below
approx. 400 V.
(Control supply fault) Control
power supply fault is detected
while the Inverter output is
OFF.
Main circuit power supply
connections
Terminal screws: Loose?
Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC voltage) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the Inverter may be faulty.
OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC voltage) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the Inverter may be faulty.
OH (Heatsink overheat)
Check the following:
• Intake air temperature.
• There is no thermal
source around the
Inverter and oil stuck to
the fan has not lowered
the cooling capability.
• Fan is not clogged.
• No foreign matters, such
as water, is inside the
Inverter.
CAL (MEMOBUS communications waiting)
Check the following:
• Communications devices
and transmission signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Wiring is made properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
Main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level while the Inverter
output is OFF.
Detection level:
200 V: approx. 410 V or more
400 V: approx. 820 V or more
Intake air temperature increased while the Inverter
output is OFF.
Flashing
Flashing
198
Causes and
Corrective Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Correct data has not been received from the PLC when
the constants n003 (Run
Command Selection) is 2 or
n004 (Frequency Reference
Selection) is 6, and power is
turned ON.
•
•
•
8 Fault Diagnosis
Alarm Display
Digital
Operator
Flashing
Inverter
Status
Description
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact output is not activated.
OH8 (Motor Overheating)
The motor temperature PTC
thermistor input exceeded the
alarm detection level.
†
•
•
•
OP† (Constant setting
error when constants
are set through MEMOBUS communications)
(Flashing)
Causes and
Corrective Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Check the size of the load
and the length of the
acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the input motor
temperature.
Check the setting values.
OP1: Two or more values
are set for multi-function input selection.
(constants n050 to
n056)
OP2: Relationship among V/f
constants is not correct. (constants n011,
n013, n014, n016)
OP3: Setting value of motor
rated current exceeds
150% of Inverter Rated
Current. (constant
n036)
OP4: Upper/lower limit of frequency reference is reversed. (constants
n033, n034)
OP5: Relationship among
jump frequency 1, 2
and 3 is not correct.
(constants n083 to
n085)
OP6: Multi-function Analog
Inputs (n077) and PID
Control Selection
(n128) are both set to a
value other than 0.
OP9: The setting of the Inverter capacity does
not coincide with the
Inverter. (Contact your
OMRON representative.)
199
Alarm Display
Digital
Operator
Flashing
Flashing
Flashing
200
Inverter
Status
Description
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact output is not
activated.
OL3 (Overtorque detection)
Causes and
Corrective Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Motor current exceeded the
preset value in constant
n098.
Overtorque detection level
was exceeded because of increased leak current due to
excessively long wiring.
•
•
•
Reduce the load, and
increase the acceleration/deceleration time.
Refer to the paragraph
of Carrier Frequency
Selection (n080)14kHz
max on page 94.
Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcircuit, etc.).
SER (Sequence error)
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
UL3 (Undertorque detection)
•
Inverter received Local/Remote Command or communications/control circuit terminal
changing signals from the
multi-function terminal while
the Inverter output is ON.
When V/f mode is selected:
The Inverter’s output current
was less than the undertorque detection level (n118).
When vector mode is selected: The output current or output torque was less than the
detection level (n097 or
n118).
Operation when undertorque
is detected will be determined
by the setting in n117.
•
Check the setting in
n118.
Check the operating conditions, and remove the
cause.
8 Fault Diagnosis
Alarm Display
Digital
Operator
Flashing
Description
Causes and
Corrective Actions
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact output is not
activated.
BB (External Baseblock)
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
EF (Simultaneous FWD/
REV Run Commands)
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
STP (Operator function
stop)
•
Baseblock Command at
multi-function terminal is ON
and the Inverter output is
OFF (motor coasting). Condition is cleared when input
command is removed.
When FWD and REV Run
Commands are simultaneously input for over 500
ms, the Inverter stops according to constant n005.
Flashing
or
Flashing
Inverter
Status
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
was pressed during
running via a control circuit
terminal FWD/REV Run
Command, or by a Run Command from communications.
The Inverter stops according
to constant n005.
STP (Emergency stop)
Inverter received emergency
stop alarm signal. Inverter
stops according to constant
n005.
FAN (Cooling fan fault)
Cooling fan is locked.
Flashing
Turn OFF FWD/REV Run
Command of control circuit terminals.
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
Check the following:
• Cooling fan
• Cooling fan connection
• Foreign matter is not
interrupting rotation.
• Fan is mounted correctly.
• Relay connector is connected properly after
replacement of the fan.
201
Alarm Display
Digital
Operator
Flashing
Flashing
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and
Corrective Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
or
Detected as
an alarm
only. Fault
contact output is not activated.
CE (MEMOBUS) communications fault
Check the following:
• Communication devices
or communication signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Wiring is made properly.
FBL (PID feedback loss
detection)
Check the mechanical system and correct the cause, or
increase the value of n137.
PID feedback value dropped
below the detection level
(n137). When PID feedback
loss is detected, the Inverter
operates according to the
n136 setting.
Option card communica- Check the following:
• Communications devices
tions fault.
•
Flashing
•
Communication fault has
occurred in a mode
where the communications option card was
used and a Run Command or frequency reference was input from the
PLC.
Communication fault has
occurred in a mode
where a Run Command
and frequency reference
are set from the communication option card.
OH3 (Inverter overheat
alarm)
Flashing
202
The Inverter overheat alarm
(OH3) was input from a multifunction input terminal (S1
and S7).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
or communications signals.
PLC is not faulty.
Transmission cable is
connected properly.
Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
Wiring is made properly.
Communication option
card is inserted correctly.
Clear the multi-function
input terminal’s Inverter
overheat alert input.
Check that the wiring is
made properly.
Check that a signal is not
input from the PLC.
8 Fault Diagnosis
Fault Display
Fault Displays and Meanings
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OC (Overcurrent)
Operation is restored, if no
fault is found, after confirming
the following:
• Short circuit or grounding
at Inverter output side
• Excessive load GD2
• Extremely rapid
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time (constants n019 to
n022)
• Special motor used
• Starting motor during
coasting
• Motor of a capacity
greater than the Inverter
rating has been started.
• Magnetic contactor
opened/closed at the
Inverter output side
• Leak current increased
because of excessively
long wiring
Note: Before turning the power ON again, make sure that
no short-circuit or ground fault
occurs at the Inverter output.
GF (Grounding) *1 *2
Inverter output grounded.
⇓
Check the cause, and restore the operation.
Inverter output current momentarily exceeded approx.
250% of rated current.
Grounding current exceeded
approx. 50%
of Inverter rated output current at the Inverter output
side.
SC (Load shortcircuit) *1
Inverter output or load shortcircuited.
Note: Before turning the
power ON again, make sure
that no short-circuit or
ground fault occurs at the Inverter output.
Inverter output shortcircuited or grounded.
⇓
Check the cause, and restore the operation.
* 1. Indicates that an Inverter of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Classes) is attached.
* 2. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the motor is running. A ground fault
may not be detected in the following cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
203
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OV (Main circuit overvoltage)
1. Regenerative energy is
large.
• The setting of deceleration time is too short.
• Negative load (e.g., elevator) is excessive at
lowering.
• Confirm that the load
does not have any problem.
2. Input voltage is erroneous.
Confirm that DC voltage
exceeding the left value
is not input.
UV1 (Main circuit low
voltage)
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Main circuit power supply
connections
• Terminal screws: Loose?
• Monitor value
Confirm voltage (DC voltage) between terminals
"+1" and "-".
⇓
If there is no problem, the Inverter may be faulty.
Main circuit DC voltage level
exceeded the overvoltage detection level while the Inverter
was running.
Detection level (DC voltage:
Voltage between terminals
"+1" and "-")
200 V: Approx. 410 V or more
400 V: Approx. 820 V or more
Main circuit DC voltage
dropped below the low-voltage detection level while the
Inverter output is ON.
200 V: Stops at main circuit
DC voltage below approx. 200 V (160 V for
single-phase)
400 V: Stops at main circuit
DC voltage below approx. 400 V.
UV2 (Control power sup- Replace the Inverter.
ply fault)
Inverter detected voltage fault
of control power supply during running.
204
8 Fault Diagnosis
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OH (Heatsink overheat)
Temperature increased because of Inverter overload operation or intake air
temperature rise.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Excessive load
Improper V/f pattern setting
Insufficient acceleration
time if the fault occurs
during acceleration
Intake air temperature
exceeding 50°C (122°F)
Cooling fan stops.
Cooling fan has lowered
cooling capability or
stops.
Heatsink is clogged.
There is a thermal source
around the Inverter
⇓
Check the following:
• Load size
• V/f pattern setting (constants n011 to n017)
• Intake air temperature.
• Cooling fan is turning
while the Inverter is running.
• Foreign matter on the fan
is not interrupting rotation.
• Fan is mounted properly.
• There is no thermal
source around the
Inverter.
OH9 (Motor overheating)
•
•
•
RH (Externally-mounting-type braking resistor
overheat) *
Protection of externally
mounting-type
braking resistor operated.
•
Check the size of the load
and the length of the
acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times.
Check the V/f characteristics.
Check the input motor
temperature.
•
Insufficient deceleration
time
Excessive motor regenerative energy
•
⇓
Increase deceleration
time
Reduce regenerative load
•
* Indicates that an Inverter of 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW (200 V and 400 V Classes) is attached.
205
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OL1 (Motor overload)
Motor overload protection operated by built-in electronic
thermal overload relay.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
OL2 (Inverter overload)
Inverter overload protection
operated by built-in electronic thermal overload relay.
•
•
•
•
•
206
Check the load size or V/f
pattern setting (constants
n011 to n017).
Set the motor rated current shown on the nameplate in constant n036.
Check that the settings of
motor protection (whether
motor cooling method is
self-cooled or fan-cooled)
and motor protection time
constant are made correctly.
Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pattern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
Recheck the item of
motor protection and set
the constants again if
necessary.
Refer to Carrier Frequency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcircuit, etc.).
Check the load size or V/f
pattern setting (constants
n011 to n017).
Check the Inverter capacity.
Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pattern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
Refer to Carrier Frequency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcircuit, etc.).
8 Fault Diagnosis
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
OL3 (Overtorque detection)
V/f mode: Inverter output current exceeded the preset value in constant n098.
Vector mode: Motor output
current or torque exceeded
the preset value in constants
n097 and n098.
When overtorque is detected, Inverter performs operation according to the preset
setting of constant n096.
•
•
•
•
Check the driven
machine and correct the
cause of the fault, or
increase the value of
constant n098 up to the
highest value allowed for
the machine.
Check the load size, V/f
set value, operation pattern, etc. to confirm that
the load is not excessive
under actual operation.
Refer to Carrier Frequency Selection
(n080)14kHz max on
page 94.
Check the wiring
(increase of current
caused by rare shortcircuit, etc.).
PF (Main circuit voltage
fault)
Open phase of input
supply
Momentary power loss
Excessive fluctuation in
input supply voltage
• Unbalanced line voltage
⇓
Check the following:
• Main circuit power supply connections
• Power supply voltage
• Terminal screws:
Loose?
LF (Output open phase)
•
The main circuit’s DC voltage
oscillated in an irregular way
when not in regenerative operation.
An open phase occurred in
Inverter output.
•
•
•
Disconnection in output
cable
Disconnection in motor
windings
• Loose output terminal
screws
⇓
Check the following:
• Disconnection in output
wiring
• Motor impedance
• Terminal screws:
Loose?
•
207
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
†
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
UL3 (Undertorque detection)
When V/f mode is selected:
The Inverter’s output current
was less than the Undertorque Detection Level
(n118).
When vector mode is selected:
The output current or output
torque was less than the detection level (n097 to n118).
Operation when undertorque
is detected will be determined
by the setting in n117.
•
•
EF† (External fault)
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection
(constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
CPF-00
Cycle power after confirming
that the Digital Operator is securely mounted. If the fault remains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-01
Transmission fault occurred
for 5 s or more when transmission starts with the Digital
Operator.
Cycle power after confirming
that the Digital Operator is securely mounted. If the fault remains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-04
•
Inverter receives an external
fault input from control circuit
terminal.
EF0: External fault reference
through MEMOBUS
communications
EF1: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S1
EF2: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S2
EF3: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S3
EF4: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S4
EF5: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S5 *
EF6: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S6 *
EF7: External Fault Input
Command from control circuit terminal S7
Inverter cannot communicate
with the Digital Operator for 5
s or more when power is
turned ON.
EEPROM fault of Inverter
control circuit was detected.
•
208
Check the setting in
n118.
Check the operating
conditions, and remove
the cause.
Record all constant data
and initialize the constants. (Refer to page
53.)
Cycle power. If the fault
remains, replace the
Inverter.
8 Fault Diagnosis
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
CPF-05
AD converter fault was detected.
Cycle power.
If the fault remains, replace
the Inverter.
CPF-06
•
•
•
Option card connection
fault
A non-corresponding
option card is connected.
•
•
Cycle power to the
Inverter after checking
the connection of the
Communication option
card.
Verify Software Version
No. (n179).
Check the applicable
Inverter software number
that is listed in the
instruction manual of the
Communications Option
Card.
CPF-07
Cycle power after checking
that the Digital Operator is
securely mounted. If the fault
remains, replace the Digital
Operator or Inverter.
CPF-11
Combination error
Control circuit is not combined with correct software.
(Contact your OMRON representative.)
Communication option
card self-diagnostic error
•
•
•
Operator control circuit (EEPROM or AD converter) fault
Communication option
card model code error
Option card fault.
Replace the option card.
Confirm that no foreign
matter is on the Communications Option Card.
Communication option
card DPRAM error
OPR (Operator connecting fault)
Cycle power. If the fault remains, replace the Inverter.
CE (MEMOBUS communications fault)
Check the following:
• Communications
devices or communications signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Wiring is made properly.
209
Fault Display
Digital
Operator
Inverter
Status
Description
Stops according to
constant.
STP (Emergency stop)
Check the following:
• NO/NC contact selection (constant).
• Wiring is made properly.
• Signal is not input from
the PLC.
FBL (PID feedback loss
detection)
Check the mechanical system and correct the cause,
or increase the value of
n137.
Option card communications fault
Check the following:
• Communications
devices or communications signals.
• PLC is not faulty.
• Transmission cable is
connected properly.
• Wiring is made properly.
• Any loose terminal
screws do not result in
improper contact.
• Communication option
card is not inserted correctly.
• Insufficient power
supply voltage
• Control power supply fault
• Hardware fault
Check the following:
• Power supply voltage
• Main circuit power supply connections
• Terminal screws: Loose?
• Control sequence.
• Replace the Inverter.
The Inverter stopped according to constant n005 after receiving the emergency stop
fault signal.
PID feedback value dropped
below the detection level.
When PID feedback loss is
detected, the Inverter operates according to the n136
setting.
or
A communication error occurred in the mode where
the communication option
card was used and a Run
Command or frequency reference was input from the
PLC.
(OFF)
Causes and Corrective
Actions
RUN (Green)
ALARM (Red)
Protective
Operation
Output is
turned OFF
and motor
coasts to a
stop.
* To display or clear the fault history, refer to page 49.
210
8 Fault Diagnosis
Errors Occurring during Autotuning
Indication
Meaning
Cause
E02
Alarm
An alarm (XXX) was detected during tuning.
E03
STOP key input
The STOP key was pressed during tuning and tuning was cancelled.
E04
Resistance
error
•
Corrective Action
•
•
•
E05
E09
•
No-load current
error
Acceleration
error
Tuning was not completed in
the specified time.
Tuning results were outside
the setting range for constants.
−
•
•
•
•
The motor did not accelerate in the
specified time.
•
•
•
E12
Current
detection error
•
•
•
Current flow exceeded motor
rated current.
The sign of the detected current was reversed.
At least one of phases U, V,
and W is open.
Check input data.
Check wiring and the machine
environment.
Check the load.
Check input data.
Check motor wiring.
Disconnect the motor from the
machine system if connected
during rotational autotuning.
Change the Maximum Voltage
if the Maximum Voltage is
higher than the Inverter input
power supply voltage.
Increase Acceleration Time 1
(n019).
If Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration (n093) has been
lowered, return it to the initial
value.
Disconnect the motor from the
machine system, if connected.
Check the current detection circuit,
motor wiring, and current detector
installation.
211
„ Troubleshooting
Trouble
The motor does not
operate when an
external operation
signal is input.
Cause
Set the RUN command (n003) to
Control Circuit Terminal.
A 3-wire sequence is in effect.
The Multi-function Input Selection
(n052) is set to 3-wire sequence, and
the S2 control terminal is not closed.
To use a 3-wire sequence, make the
wiring so that the S2 control terminal
is closed. To use a 2-wire sequence,
set the Multi-function Input (n052) to a
value other than 3-wire sequence.
The frequency reference is too
low.
Input a frequency reference greater
than the Min. Output Frequency
(n016).
The RUN command (n003) is not set
to Control Circuit Terminal.
The input frequency reference is lower
than the setting for the Min.Output
Frequency (n016).
Local mode is in effect.
Set the LO/RE selection of the Digital
Operator to RE.
The V-I SW (SW2) setting is
wrong.
For analog input, make sure that the
Frequency Reference (n004) and SW2
settings are correct.
The setting of NPN/PNP switch
(SW1) is not correct.
Set SW1 correctly.
Program mode is enabled.
Press DSPL to make FREF flash
and change to Drive mode.
The stall prevention level during
acceleration is too low.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration (n093) is set to an
appropriate value.
The stall prevention level during
running is too low.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set to an
appropriate value.
The load is too heavy.
•
Example: The reference 4 to 20 mA is
input, but SW2 is set to “V.”
The motor stops. The
torque is not output.
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Acceleration (n093) is set too
low, the output current reaches the set
level, the output frequency is stopped,
and the acceleration time is
lengthened.
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set too low,
the output current reaches the set
level, and the speed drops.
If the load is too heavy, stall
prevention is activated, the output
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.
212
Corrective Actions
The operation method selection
is wrong.
•
Lengthen the set acceleration time
(n019).
Reduce the load.
When the maximum frequency
(n011) was changed, the maximum voltage frequency (n013)
was also changed.
To increase the speed of a generalpurpose motor, only change the
maximum frequency (n011).
The V/f set value is too low.
Set the V/f (n011 to n017) according to
the load characteristics.
8 Fault Diagnosis
Trouble
Cause
The motor speed is
unstable. The motor
speed fluctuates when
operating with a light
load.
The stall prevention level during
running is too low.
Check if the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is set to an
appropriate value.
The load is too heavy.
Reduce the load.
The carrier frequency is too
high.
Decrease the carrier frequency (n080).
The V/f set value is too high for
a low-speed operation.
Set the V/f (n011 to n017) according to
the load characteristics.
The maximum frequency (n011)
and maximum voltage frequency (n013) were incorrectly adjusted.
Set the maximum frequency (n011)
and the maximum voltage frequency
(n013) according to the motor
specifications.
The Inverter is used for an
operation at 1.5 Hz or less.
Do not use the V7 Inverter for an
operation that runs at 1.5 Hz or less.
For an operation at 1.5 Hz or less, use
a different Inverter model.
The analog reference input is
unstable and has noise
interference.
Increase the set value for the filter time
constant (n062).
The power is not being
supplied.
Check if the power is being supplied.
Because the Digital Operator is not
correctly mounted, the display does
not appear.
Mount the Digital Operator correctly.
Short-circuit bar for terminals +1
and +2 is not connected.
Confirm that the short-circuit bar is
connected properly.
POWER charge indicator lamp
lights but the Digital Operator
does not give any display after
the power supply is turned ON.
Since the main circuit fuse is blown,
replace the Inverter.
Because the Stall Prevention Level
during Running (n094) is too low, the
output current reaches the set level
and the speed drops.
Corrective Actions
If the load is too heavy, stall
prevention is activated, the output
frequency is stopped, and the
acceleration time is lengthened.
If operating the motor with a light load,
a high carrier frequency may cause
the motor speed to fluctuate.
Because the set value for the V/f is too
high, over-excitation occurs at low
speeds.
Example: To operate a 60-Hz motor at
40 Hz or less, the maximum frequency
and base frequency are set to 40 Hz.
The LED of the Digital
Operator is unlit.
The breaker or other component on
the power input side is not turned ON,
and the power is not being supplied.
213
9 Specifications
„ Standard Specifications (200 V Class)
Voltage Class
200 V single-/3-phase
3-phase
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
24P0
25P5
Single-phase
B0P1
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7
B1P5
B2P2
B4P0
-
-
Max. Applicable Motor Output
kW*1
0.1
0.25
0.55
1.1
1.5
2.2
4.0
5.5
7.5
Inverter Capacity (kVA)
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
6.7
9.5
13
Rated Output Current
(A)
0.8
1.6
3
5
8
11
17.5
25
33
Power Supply
Output Characteristics
Model
CIMRV7AZ††
††
214
Max. Output Voltage
(V)
Max. Output Frequency (Hz)
Rated Input Voltage
and Frequency
Allowable Voltage
Fluctuation
Allowable Frequency
Fluctuation
3-phase, 200 to 230 V (proportional to input voltage)
Single-phase, 200 to 240 V (proportional to input voltage)
400 Hz (Programmable)
3-phase, 200 to 230 V, 50/60 Hz
Single-phase, 200 to 240 V, 50/60 Hz
−15% to +10%
±5%
27P5
9 Specifications
Voltage Class
Model
CIMRV7AZ††
††
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
24P0
25P5
27P5
Single-phase
B0P1
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7
B1P5
B2P2
B4P0
-
-
Control Method
Frequency Control
Range
Frequency Accuracy
(Temperature Change)
Control Characteristics
200 V single-/3-phase
3-phase
Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital reference: ±0.01% (−10 to 50°C)
Analog reference: ±0.5% (25 ±10°C)
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital reference:
0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency
Output Frequency
Resolution
0.01 Hz
Overload Capacity
Frequency Reference
Signal
Acceleration/
Deceleration Time
Braking Torque
V/f Characteristics
150% rated output current for one minute
0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) pulse train
input, frequency setting potentiometer (Selectable)
0.00 to 6000 s
(Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Short-term average deceleration torque*2
0.1, 0.25 kW (0.13 HP, 0.25 HP): 150% or more
0.55, 1.1 kW (0.5 HP, 1 HP): 100% or more
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50% or more
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20% or more
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional braking resistor, braking transistor built-in)
Possible to program any V/f pattern
215
Voltage Class
Model
CIMRV7AZ††
††
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
24P0
25P5
27P5
Single-phase
B0P1
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7
B1P5
B2P2
B4P0
-
-
Protective Functions
Motor Overload
Protection
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% or more of Inverter rated current
Overload
Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output current
Overvoltage
Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceeds 410 V
Undervoltage
Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 200 V or less (approx. 160 V or
less for single-phase series).
Momentary Power
Loss
The following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15
ms or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or shorter, continuous operation.
Heatsink Overheat
Protected by electronic circuit.
Stall Prevention Level
Can be set to individual levels during acceleration/constant-speed operation, provided/not provided available during deceleration.
Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).
Ground Fault*4
Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).*3
Power Charge
Indication
ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less. RUN indicator stays
ON or Digital Operator indicator stays ON.
Multi-function
Input
Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward Run Command, Reverse Run Command, Forward/Reverse Run (3-wire sequence)
Command, Fault Reset, external fault, multi-step speed operation, Jog
Command, acceleration/deceleration time select, External Baseblock,
Speed Search Command, Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command,
LOCAL/REMOTE selection, communication/control circuit terminal selection, emergency stop fault, emergency stop alarm, Up/Down Command,
self-test, PID control cancel, PID integral reset/hold, Inverter overheat
alarm
Multi-function
Output*5
The following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC contact output, 2
photocoupler outputs):
Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection, overtorque detection, undervoltage detection, minor error, baseblock, operating mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV, speed search, data output
through communications, PID feedback loss detection, frequency reference loss, Inverter overheat alarm
Input Signals
Output Signals
Output Functions
Electronic thermal overload relay
Instantaneous Overcurrent
Cooling Fan Fault
Standard Functions
216
200 V single-/3-phase
3-phase
Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensation, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop, frequency reference bias/gain, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, max. 19.2 k
bps), PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency reference with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency reference
setting/display, multi-function analog input
9 Specifications
Voltage Class
Indications
Other Functions
Model
CIMRV7AZ††
††
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
24P0
25P5
27P5
Single-phase
B0P1
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7
B1P5
B2P2
B4P0
-
-
Status
Indicators
Digital Operator (JVOP-140)
Terminals
Wiring Distance
between Inverter and
Motor
Enclosure
Environmental Condi-
200 V single-/3-phase
3-phase
RUN and ALARM provided as standard indicators
Provided for monitor frequency reference, output frequency, output current
Main circuit: screw terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
100 m (328 ft) or less*6
Open chassis (IP20, IP00)*7, or enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
(TYPE 1)*8
Cooling Method
Cooling fan is provided for the following models:
200 V, 0.75 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
200 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (single-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.
Ambient Temperature
Open chassis (IP20, IP00): −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
and enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1): −10 to 40 °C (14 to 105
°F) (not frozen)
Humidity
Storage Temperature*9
Location
95% or less (non-condensing)
−20 to 60 °C (−4 to 140 °F)
Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation
1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less
Vibration
Up to 9.8 m/s2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,
up to 2 m/s2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz
* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.
* 3. The operation level becomes approx. 50% of Inverter rated output current
in case of Inverters of 5.5 kW or 7.5 kW.
* 4. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the
motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following
cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 5. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
* 6. For details, refer to “Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max” on
page 94.
217
* 7. 0P1 to 3P7 are of IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom covers
when Inverter 5P5 or 7P5 of open chassis mounting type is used.
* 8. NEMA 1 of 0P1 to 3P7 is optional, while NEMA 1 of 5P5 and 7P5 is provided as standard.
* 9. Temperature during shipping (for short period).
„ Standard Specifications (400 V Class)
Voltage Class
Model
CIMRV7AZ†
†††
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P0
44P0
45P5
47P5
Single-phase
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
0.37
0.55
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
Power Supply
Output Characteristics
Max. Applicable Motor Output
kW*1
218
400 V 3-phase
3-phase
Inverter Capacity (kVA)
0.9
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.2
5.5
7.0
11
14
Rated Output Current
(A)
1.2
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
7.2
9.2
14.8
18
Max. Output Voltage
(V)
Max. Output
Frequency (Hz)
Rated Input Voltage
and Frequency
Allowable Voltage
Fluctuation
Allowable Frequency
Fluctuation
3-phase, 380 to 460 V (proportional to input voltage)
400 Hz (Programmable)
3-phase, 380 to 460 V, 50/60 Hz
−15 to +10%
±5%
9 Specifications
Voltage Class
Model
CIMRV7AZ†
†††
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P0
44P0
45P5
47P5
Single-phase
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control Method
Frequency Control
Range
Control Characteristics
Frequency Accuracy
(Temperature Change)
Sine wave PWM (V/f control/vector control selectable)
0.1 to 400 Hz
Digital reference: ±0.01 %, −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
Analog reference: ±0.5 %, 25±10 °C (59 to 95 °F)
Frequency Setting
Resolution
Digital reference:
0.01 Hz (less than 100 Hz)/0.1 Hz (100 Hz or more)
Analog reference: 1/1000 of max. output frequency
Output Frequency
Resolution
0.01 Hz
Overload Capacity
150% rated output current for one minute
Frequency Reference
Signal
0 to 10 VDC (20 kΩ), 4 to 20 mA (250 Ω), 0 to 20 mA (250 Ω) pulse train
input, frequency setting potentiometer (Selectable)
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
0.00 to 6000 s
(Acceleration/deceleration time are independently programmed.)
Braking Torque
V/f Characteristics
Motor Overload
Protection
Instantaneous Overcurrent
Overload
Protective Functions
400 V 3-phase
3-phase
Short-term average deceleration torque*2
0.2 kW: 150% or more
0.75 kW: 100% or more
1.5 kW (2 HP): 50% or more
2.2 kW (3 HP) or more: 20% or more
Continuous regenerative torque: Approx. 20% (150% with optional braking resistor, braking transistor built-in)
Possible to program any V/f pattern
Electronic thermal overload relay
Motor coasts to a stop at approx. 250% or more of Inverter rated current
Motor coasts to a stop after 1 minute at 150% of Inverter rated output current
Overvoltage
Motor coasts to a stop if DC bus voltage exceeds 820 V
Undervoltage
Stops when DC bus voltage is approx. 400 V or less
Momentary Power
Loss
The following items are selectable: Not provided (stops if power loss is 15
ms or longer), continuous operation if power loss is approx. 0.5 s or shorter, continuous operation.
Heatsink Overheat
Protected by electronic circuit.
Stall Prevention Level
Can be set to individual levels during acceleration/constant-speed operation, provided/not provided available during deceleration.
Cooling Fan Fault
Protected by electronic circuit (fan lock detection).
Ground Fault*4
Protected by electronic circuit (overcurrent level).*3
Power Charge
Indication
ON until the DC bus voltage becomes 50 V or less. Charge LED is provided.
219
Voltage Class
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P0
44P0
45P5
47P5
Single-phase
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Multi-function
Input
Seven of the following input signals are selectable: Forward Run Command, Reverse Run Command, Forward/Reverse Run (3-wire sequence)
Command, Fault Reset, external fault, multi-step speed operation, Jog
Command, acceleration/deceleration time select, External Baseblock,
Speed Search Command, Acceleration/Deceleration Hold Command,
LOCAL/REMOTE selection, communication/control circuit terminal selection, emergency stop fault, emergency stop alarm, Up/Down Command,
self-test, PID control cancel, PID integral reset/hold, Inverter overheat
alarm
Multi-function
Output*5
The following output signals are selectable (1 NO/NC contact output, 2
photocoupler outputs):
Fault, running, zero speed, frequency agree, frequency detection, overtorque detection, undertorque detection, minor error, baseblock, operating mode, Inverter run ready, fault retry, UV, speed search, data output
through communications, PID feedback loss detection, frequency reference loss, Inverter overheat alarm
Output Signals
Output Functions
Indications
Other Functions
Standard Functions
Status Indicators
Digital
Operator
(JVOP-140)
Terminals
Wiring Distance
between Inverter and
Motor
Environmental Condi-
Enclosure
220
400 V 3-phase
3-phase
Input Signals
Model
CIMRV7AZ†
†††
Voltage vector control, full-range automatic torque boost, slip compensation, DC injection braking current/time at startup/stop, frequency reference bias/gain, MEMOBUS communications (RS-485/422, max. 19.2
kbps), PID control, energy-saving control, constant copy, frequency reference with built-in potentiometer, unit selection for frequency reference
setting/display, multi-function analog input
RUN and ALARM provided as standard indicators
Monitor frequency reference, output frequency, and output current provided.
Main circuit: screw terminals
Control circuit: plug-in screw terminal
100 m (328 ft) or less*6
Open chassis (IP20, IP00)*7, or enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1
(TYPE 1) *8
Cooling Method
Cooling fan is provided for the following models:
400 V, 1.5 kW or larger Inverters (3-phase)
Other models are self-cooling.
Ambient Temperature
Open chassis (IP20, IP00): −10 to 50 °C (14 to 122 °F)
Enclosed wall-mounted NEMA 1 (TYPE 1): −10 to 40 °C (14 to 105°F)
(not frozen)
Humidity
Storage Temperature*9
95 % or less (non-condensing)
−20 to 60 °C (−4 to 140 °F)
Location
Indoor (free from corrosive gases or dust)
Elevation
1,000 m (3,280 ft) or less
Vibration
Up to 9.8 m/s2 (1G) at 10 to less than 20 Hz,
up to 2 m/s2 (0.2G) at 20 to 50 Hz
9 Specifications
* 1. Based on a standard 4-pole motor for max. applicable motor output.
* 2. Shows deceleration torque for uncoupled motor decelerating from 60 Hz
with the shortest possible deceleration time.
* 3. The operation level becomes approx. 50% of Inverter rated output current
in case of Inverters of 5.5 kW or 7.5 kW.
* 4. The ground fault here is one which occurs in the motor wiring while the
motor is running. A ground fault may not be detected in the following
cases.
• A ground fault with low resistance which occurs in motor cables or terminals.
• A ground fault occurs when the power is turned ON.
* 5. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
* 6. For details, refer to “Carrier Frequency Selection (n080)14kHz max” on
page 94.
* 7. 0P1 to 3P7 are of IP20. Be sure to remove the top and bottom covers
when Inverter 5P5 or 7P5 of open chassis mounting type is used.
* 8. NEMA 1 of 0P1 to 3P7 is optional, while NEMA 1 of 5P5 and 7P5 is provided as standard.
* 9. Temperature during shipping (for short period).
221
„ Standard Wiring
DC Reactor
(Optional)
U
Thermal
Overload Braking Resistor
(Optional)
Relay
X
Short-circuit bar*1
Power Supply
For Singlephase.
Use R/L1
and S/L2.
MCCB
+2
−
B1
B2
R/L1
S
S/L2
V/T2
T
T/L3
W/T3
Forward Run/Stop
U/T1
Grounding
S3
Fault Reset
Multi-step
Speed Ref. 1
Multi-step
Speed Ref. 2
S4
Jog Command
S7
MA
S5
MB
S6
MC
SW1 NPN
+24V
Pulse Train Input
RP
FS
2kΩ
FR
P P
FC
Frequency Setting
Potentiometer
Multi-function
Contact Output*2
250 VAC: 1 A or less
30 VDC: 1 A or less
Fault
P1
Running
SC
Frequency Ref.
IM
S1
S2
Reverse Run/Stop
External Fault
(NO Contact)
Multi-function input
+1
R
PNP
Shield connection
terminal
Reference Pulse Train
(Max. 33 kHz)
Multi-function
Photocoupler
Output
+48 VDC, 50 mA
or less
P2
Frequency
Agreed
Frequency Setting Power
Supply (+12 V 20 mA)
Frequency Reference
PC
0 to +10 V (20 kΩ)
4 to 20 mA (250 Ω)/0 to 20 mA (250 Ω)
0V
Digital Operator
Frequency
Setting
Potentiometer
MIN
CN2
IIN
MAX
R+
P
MEMOBUS
Communications
RS-485/422
Max. 19.2 kbps
VIN
GND
AC
Shielded
2
4 to 20 mA
P P 0V
Terminal Resistance
(1/2 W, 120 Ω)
Multi-function
analog input
3
Analog Monitor
Output
0 to +10 VDC (2 mA)
AM
R-
S+
P
0 to 10 V
1
P
FM
Output
Frequency
Analog Monitor/Pulse
Monitor Selectable
S-
P
Shielded twisted-pair cable
: Only basic insulation (protective class 1, overvoltage category II) is provided for the
control circuit terminals. Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to
conform to CE requirements.
*1. Short-circuit bar should be removed when connecting a DC reactor.
*2. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
222
9 Specifications
Connection Example of Braking Resistor
Overload Relay
Trip Contact
Braking
Resistor *
3-phase
Power
Supply
Motor
Braking Resistor Unit
Overload Relay Trip Contact
Fault Contact
* Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting n092 to 1 when using
a Braking Resistor Unit. The motor may not stop within the deceleration
time if this setting is not changed.
Terminal Descriptions
Main Circuit
Type
Terminal
Name
Function (Signal Level)
R/L1, S/L2,
T/L3
AC power supply input
Use main circuit power input. (Use terminals R/L1 and S/
L2 for single-phase Inverters. Never use terminal T/L3.)
U/T1, V/T2,
W/T3
Inverter output
Inverter output
B1, B2
Braking resistor connection
Braking resistor connection
+2, +1
DC reactor connection
When connecting optional DC reactor, remove the main
circuit short-circuit bar between +2 and +1.
DC power supply
input
DC power supply input (+1: positive −: negative)*1
Grounding
For grounding (according to the local grounding codes)
+1, -
223
Terminal
Multi-function contact output
Output
Frequency reference
Control Circuit
Input
Sequence
Type
AM
Name
Multi-function input
selection 1
Factory setting closed: FWD run
open: Stop
S2
Multi-function input
selection 2
Factory setting closed: REV run
open: Stop
S3
Multi-function input
selection 3
Factory setting: External fault
(NO contact)
S4
Multi-function input
selection 4
Factory setting: Fault reset
S5
Multi-function input
selection 5
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
reference 1
S6
Multi-function input
selection 6
Factory setting: Multi-step speed
reference 2
S7
Multi-function input
selection 7
Factory Setting: Jog Command
SC
Multi-function input
selection common
For control signal
RP
Master reference
pulse train input
33 kHz max.
FS
Power for frequency
setting
+12 V (permissible current 20 mA max.)
FR
Master frequency
reference
0 to +10 VDC (20 kΩ) or 4 to 20 mA (250 kΩ) or 0 to 20
mA (250 Ω) (1/1000 resolution)
FC
Frequency reference
common
0V
MA
NO contact output
Factory setting: fault
MB
NC contact output
MC
Contact output
common
P1
Photocoupler output 1
Factory setting: Run
P2
Photocoupler output 2
Factory setting: Frequency agree
PC
Photocoupler output
common
0V
Analog monitor output
Factory setting:
Output frequency
0 to +10 V
Analog monitor
common
0V
*2
AC
224
Function (Signal Level)
S1
Photocoupler
insulation, 24
VDC, 8 mA
Contact capacity
250 VAC: 1 A or less,*3
30 VDC: 1 A or less
Photocoupler
output +48 VDC,
50 mA or less
0 to +10 VDC, 2 mA or less,
8-bit resolution
9 Specifications
Terminal
MEMOBUS communications
Communication Circuit Terminal
Type
Name
R+
Communications
input (+)
R-
Communications
input (-)
S+
Communications
output (+)
S-
Communications
output (-)
Function (Signal Level)
MEMOBUS
communications
Run through RS-485
or RS-422.
RS-485/422 MEMOBUS
protocol 19.2 kbps max.
* 1. DC power supply input terminal does not conform to CE/UL standards.
* 2. Can be switched to pulse monitor output.
* 3. Minimum permissible load: 5 VDC, 10 mA (as reference value)
225
„ Sequence Input Connection with NPN/PNP
Transistor
When connecting sequence inputs (S1 to S7)
with a transistor, turn the rotary switch SW1
depending on the polarity (0 V common: NPN side,
+24 V common: PNP side).
Factory setting: NPN side
Sequence Connection with NPN Transistor (0 V Common)
⇣Ᏹ䊥 䉶䉾 䊃
V7AZ
S1
Forward Run/Stop
Reverse Run/Stop
Multifunction
input
External Fault (NO)
Fault Reset
Multi-step Speed Reference 1
Multi-step Speed Reference 2
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
Jog
SW1 NPN
SC
226
PNP
+24 V
9 Specifications
Sequence Connection with PNP Transistor (+24 V Common)
V7AZ
Forward
Run/Stop
Reverse
Run/Stop
External
power
supply
+24V
External
Fault (NO)
Multifunction Fault Reset
Multi-step Speed
input
Reference 1
Multi-step Speed
Reference 2
Jog
S1
S2
S3
S4
S5
S6
S7
SW1 NPN
SC
+24 V
PNP
227
W1
W
H2
H1
2-d
H
1.5
(0.06)
„ Dimensions/Heat Loss
8.5
(0.33)
D
W1
W
H2
H
H1
4-d
1.5
(0.06)
Fig. 1
8.5
(0.33)
Fig. 2
228
D
9 Specifications
H
H2
H1
4-d
W1
8.5
D
W
Fig. 3
Dimensions in mm (inches)/Mass in kg (lb)/Heat Loss (W)
Voltage Capaciclass ty (kW)
200 V
3-phase
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
d
Mass
Heat Loss (W)
Heatsink
Unit
Total
Fig.
0.1
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
56
118
5
M4
(2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
0.6
(1.32)
3.7
9.3
13.0
1
0.25
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
56
118
5
M4
(2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
0.6
(1.32)
7.7
10.3
18.0
1
0.55
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
108
56
118
5
M4
(4.25) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
0.9
(1.98)
15.8
12.3
28.1
1
1.1
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
128
56
118
5
M4
(5.04) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
1.1
(2.43)
28.4
16.7
45.1
1
1.5
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
131
96
118
5
M4
(5.16) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.4
(3.09)
53.7
19.1
72.8
2
2.2
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
96
118
5
M4
(5.51) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.3)
60.4
34.4
94.8
2
4.0
140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
128
118
5
M4
(5.63) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20)
2.1
(4.62)
96.7
52.4
149.1
2
5.5
180
260
170
164
244
8
M5
4.6
170.4
79.4
249.8
3
7.5
180
260
170
164
244
8
M5
4.8
219.2
98.9
318.1
3
229
Voltage Capaciclass ty (kW)
200 V
singlephase
400 V
3-phase
W
H
D
W1
H1
H2
d
Mass
Heat Loss (W)
Heatsink
Unit
Total
Fig.
0.1
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
76
56
118
5
M4
(2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
0.6
(1.32)
3.7
10.4
14.1
1
0.25
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
73
56
118
5
M4
(2.99) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
0.7
(1.54)
7.7
12.3
20.0
1
0.55
68
(2.68)
128
(5.04)
131
56
118
5
M4
(5.16) (2.20) (4.65) (0.20)
1.0
(2.20)
15.8
16.1
31.9
1
1.1
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
96
118
5
M4
(5.51) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.31)
28.4
23.0
51.4
2
1.5
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
96
118
5
M4
(6.14) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.31)
53.7
29.1
82.8
2
2.2
140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
163
128
118
5
M4
(6.42) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20)
2.2
(4.84)
64.5
49.1
113.6
2
4.0
170
(6.69)
128
(5.04)
180
158
118
5
M4
(7.09) (6.22) (4.65) (0.20)
2.9
(6.38)
98.2
78.2
176.4
2
0.37
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
92
96
118
5
M4
(3.62) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.0
(2.20)
9.4
13.7
23.1
2
0.55
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
110
96
118
5
M4
(4.43) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.1
(2.43)
15.1
15.0
30.1
2
1.1
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
140
96
118
5
M4
(5.51) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.31)
30.3
24.6
54.9
2
1.5
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
96
118
5
M4
(6.14) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.31)
45.8
29.9
75.7
2
2.2
108
(4.25)
128
(5.04)
156
96
118
5
M4
(6.14) (3.78) (4.65) (0.20)
1.5
(3.31)
50.5
32.5
83.0
2
3.0
140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
128
118
5
M4
(5.63) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20)
2.1
(4.62)
58.2
37.6
95.8
2
4.0
140
(5.51)
128
(5.04)
143
128
118
5
M4
(5.63) (5.04) (4.65) (0.20)
2.1
(4.62)
79.9
49.2
129.1
2
5.5
180
260
170
164
244
8
M5
4.8
168.8
87.7
256.5
3
7.5
180
260
170
164
244
8
M5
4.8
209.6
99.3
308.9
3
Note: Remove the top and bottom covers so that Inverters of 5.5/7.5 kW (200/
400 V Classes) can be used as IP00.
230
9 Specifications
„ Recommended Peripheral Devices
It is recommended that the following peripheral devices be mounted
between the AC main circuit power supply and V7AZ input terminals
R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3.
• MCCB (Molded-case Circuit Breaker)/Fuse:
Always connect for wiring protection.
• Magnetic Contactor:
Mount a surge suppressor on the coil. (Refer to the table shown
below.) When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the
Inverter, do not exceed one start per hour.
Recommended MCCB Magnetic Contactors and Fuses
• 200 V 3-phase
V7AZ Model
V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**
20P1 20P2 20P4 20P7 21P5 22P2 24P0 25P5 27P5
Capacity (kVA)
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
6.7
9.5
13.0
Rated Output Current (A)
0.8
1.6
3
5
8
11
17.5
25.0
33.0
MCCB type NF30
(MITSUBISHI)
5A
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
50 A
60A
Magnetic contactor (Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
Without SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-4-0 SC-N1 SC-N2
reactor (11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (18A) (26A) (35A)
With
reactor
Fuse (UL Class RK5)
SC- SC-N3
N2S (65A)
(50A)
SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-4-0 SC-N1 SC-N2
(11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (18A) (26A) (35A)
5A
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
50 A
SCN2S
(50A)
60 A
• 200 V Single-phase
V7AZ Model
V7**
B0P1
V7**
B0P2
V7**
B0P4
V7**
B0P7
V7**
B1P5
V7**
B2P2
Capacity (kVA)
0.3
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.0
4.2
6.7
Rated Output Current (A)
0.8
1.6
3
5
8
11
17.5
MCCB type NF30, NF50
(MITSUBISHI)
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
30 A
40 A
50 A
Without
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N2
(35A)
SC-N2 SC-N2S
(35A)
(50A)
With
reactor
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-03
(11A)
SC-4-0
(18A)
SC-N1
(26A)
SC-N2 SC-N2S
(35A)
(50A)
Magnetic contactor
(Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
V7**
B4P0
231
V7AZ Model
Fuse (UL Class RK5)
V7**
B0P1
V7**
B0P2
V7**
B0P4
V7**
B0P7
V7**
B1P5
V7**
B2P2
V7**
B4P0
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
20 A
40 A
50 A
• 400 V 3-phase
V7AZ Model
V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7** V7**
40P2 40P4 40P7 41P5 42P2 43P0 43P0 45P5 47P5
Capacity (kVA)
0.9
1.4
2.6
3.7
4.2
5.5
7.0
11.0
Rated Output Current (A)
1.2
1.8
3.4
4.8
5.5
7.2
9.2
14.8
18.0
MCCB type NF30, NF50 (MITSUBISHI)
5A
5A
5A
10 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
Magnetic contactor
(Fuji Electric FA
Components &
Systems)
14.0
Without SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-4-0 SC-4-0 SC-N1 SC-N2 SC-N2
reactor (11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (18A) (18A) (26A) (35A) (35A)
With
reactor
Fuse (UL Class RK5)
SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-03 SC-4-0 SC-N1 SC-N2
(11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (11A) (18A) (26A) (35A)
5A
5A
5A
10 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
30 A
30 A
Surge Suppressors
Surge Suppressors
Model
DCR2-
Specifications
Code No.
Large size magnetic
contactors
50A22E
250 VAC
0.5 μF 200 Ω
C002417
Control relays
MY-2, -3 (OMRON)
HH-22, -23 (FUJI)
MM-2, -4 (OMRON)
10A25C
250 VAC
0.1 μF 100 Ω
C002482
Coils and Relays
200 V to
230 V
• Ground Fault Interrupter:
Select a ground fault interrupter not affected by high frequencies. To
prevent malfunctions, the current should be 200 mA or higher and
the operating time 0.1 s or longer.
Example:
• NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1988
and after)
• EGSG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in 1984 and
after)
232
9 Specifications
• AC and DC Reactor:
Install an AC reactor to connect to a power supply transformer of
large capacity (600 kVA or more) or to improve power factor on the
power supply side.
• Noise Filter:
Use a noise filter exclusively for the Inverter if radio noise generated
from the Inverter causes other control devices to malfunction.
NOTE
1. Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Inverter
output circuit.
2. Do not connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the I/O
sides and/or a surge suppressor to the output side.
3. When a magnetic contactor is installed between the
Inverter and the motor, do not turn it ON/OFF during
operation.
For the details of the peripheral devices, refer to the catalog.
233
„ Constants List
First Functions (Constants n001 to n049)
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
001
0101H
002
0102
Name
Password
Control Mode Selection
(Note 6)
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
0 to 6,
12, 13
-
1
No
53
0, 1
-
0
(Note 1,
6)
No
59
003
0103
Run Command Selection
0 to 3
-
0
No
64
004
0104
Frequency Reference
Selection
0 to 9
-
1
No
65
005
0105
Stopping Method Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
106
006
0106
Reverse Run Prohibit
0, 1
-
0
No
74
007
0107
Stop Key Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
98
008
0108
Frequency Reference
Selection in Local Mode
0, 1
-
0
(Note 5)
No
65
009
0109
Frequency Reference Setting
Method from Digital Operator
0, 1
-
0
No
65
010
010A
Detecting Fault Contact of
Digital Operator
0, 1
-
0
No
64
011
010B
Max. Output Frequency
50.0 to 400.0
Hz
0.1 Hz
50.0 Hz
No
55
012
010C
Max. Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
200.0 V
(Note 2)
No
55
013
010D
Max. Voltage Output
Frequency
0.2 to 400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
50.0 Hz
No
55
014
010E
Mid. Output Frequency
0.1 to 399.9 Hz
0.1 Hz
1.3 Hz
(Note 6)
No
55
015
010F
Mid. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
12.0 V
(Note 2,
6)
No
55
016
0110
Min. Output Frequency
0.1 to 10.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
1.3 Hz
(Note 6)
No
55
017
0111
Min. Output Frequency
Voltage
0.1 to 50.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
12.0 V
(Note 2,
6)
No
55
018
0112
Selecting Setting Unit for Acceleration/deceleration Time
0, 1
-
0
No
79
234
9 Specifications
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
019
0113
Acceleration Time 1
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s
Yes
78
020
0114
Deceleration Time 1
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s
Yes
78
021
0115
Acceleration Time 2
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s
Yes
78
022
0116
Deceleration Time 2
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on
n018 setting
10.0 s
Yes
78
023
0117
S-curve Selection
0 to 3
-
0
No
80
024
0118
Frequency Reference 1
(Master Frequency
Reference)
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
6.00 Hz
Yes
74
025
0119
Frequency Reference 2
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
026
011A
Frequency Reference 3
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
027
011B
Frequency Reference 4
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
028
011C
Frequency Reference 5
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
029
011D
Frequency Reference 6
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
030
011E
Frequency Reference 7
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
031
011F
Frequency Reference 8
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
235
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
032
0120
Jog Frequency
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/
0.1 Hz (100
Hz or more)
6.00 Hz
Yes
75
033
0121
Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
0% to 110%
1%
100%
No
77
034
0122
Frequency Reference Lower
Limit
0% to 110%
1%
0%
No
77
035
0123
Setting/Displaying Unit Selection for Frequency Reference
0 to 3999
-
0
No
182
036
0124
Motor Rated Current
0% to 150% of
Inverter rated
current
0.1 A
(Note 3)
No
136
037
0125
Electronic Thermal Motor
Protection Selection
0 to 4
-
0
No
136,
103
038
0126
Electronic Thermal Motor Protection Time Constant Setting
1 to 60 min
1 min
8 min
No
136
039
0127
Selecting Cooling Fan
Operation
0, 1
-
0
No
141
0, 1
-
040
0128
Motor Rotation Direction
0
No
41
041
0129
Acceleration Time 3
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on 10.0 s
n018 setting
Yes
78
042
012A
Deceleration Time 3
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on 10.0 s
n018 setting
Yes
78
043
012B
Acceleration Time 4
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on 10.0 s
n018 setting
Yes
78
044
012C
Deceleration Time 4
0.00 to 6000 s Depends on 10.0 s
n018 setting
Yes
78
045
012D
Frequency Reference Bias
Step Amount (Up/Down
Command 2)
0.00 Hz to
99.99 Hz
0.01 Hz
0.00
Hz
Yes
115
046
012E
Frequency Reference Bias
Accel/Decel Rate (Up/Down
Command 2)
0, 1
-
0
Yes
115
047
012F
Frequency Reference Bias
Operation Mode Selection
(Up/Down Command 2)
0, 1
-
0
Yes
115
048
0130
Frequency Reference Bias
Value (Up/Down Command
2)
-99.9% to
100.0%
n011=100%
0.1%
0.0%
No
115
049
0131
Analog Frequency Reference Fluctuation Limit Level (Up/Down Command 2)
0.1% to
100.0%
n011=100%
0.1%
1.0%
Yes
115
236
9 Specifications
Second Functions (Constants n050 to n079)
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
050
0132
Multi-function Input Selection
1 (Terminal S1)
1 to 37
-
1
No
110
051
0133
Multi-function Input Selection
2 (Terminal S2)
1 to 37
-
2
No
110
052
0134
Multi-function Input Selection
3 (Terminal S3)
0 to 37
-
3
No
110
053
0135
Multi-function Input Selection
4 (Terminal S4)
1 to 37
-
5
No
110
054
0136
Multi-function Input Selection
5 (Terminal S5)
1 to 37
-
6
No
110
055
0137
Multi-function Input Selection
6 (Terminal S6)
1 to 37
-
7
No
110
056
0138
Multi-function Input Selection
7 (Terminal S7)
1 to 37
-
10
No
110
057
0139
Multi-function Output
Selection 1
0 to 22
-
0
No
124
058
013A
Multi-function Output
Selection 2
0 to 22
-
1
No
124
059
013B
Multi-function Output
Selection 3
0 to 22
-
2
No
124
060
013C
Analog Frequency Reference
Gain
0 % to 255 %
1%
100 %
Yes
76
061
013D
Analog Frequency Reference
Bias
-100 % to 100
%
1%
0%
Yes
76
062
013E
Filter Time Constant for
Analog Frequency Reference
0.00 to 2.00 s
0.01 s
0.10 s
Yes
-
063
013F
Watchdog Error Operation Selection (For SI-T/V7)
0 to 4
-
0
No
191
064
0140
Frequency Reference Loss
Detection Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
183
065
0141
Monitor Output Type
91
066
0142
Monitor Item Selection
067
0143
Monitor Gain
068
0144
069
0145
0, 1
-
0
No
0 to 8
-
0
No
90
0.00 to 2.00
0.01
1.00
Yes
91
Analog Frequency Reference
Gain (Voltage input from
Operator)
−255% to
255%
1%
100%
Yes
167
Analog Frequency Reference
Bias (Voltage input from
Operator)
−100% to
100%
1%
0%
Yes
167
237
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
070
0146
Analog Frequency Reference
Filter Time Constant (Voltage
input from Operator)
0.00 to 2.00 s
0.01 s
0.10 s
Yes
167
071
0147
Analog Frequency Reference
Gain (Current input from
Operator)
−255% to
255%
1%
100%
Yes
167
072
0148
Analog Frequency Reference
Bias (Current input from
Operator)
−100% to
100%
1%
0%
Yes
167
073
0149
Analog Frequency Reference
Filter Time Constant (Current
input from Operator)
0.00 to 2.00 s
0.01 s
0.10 s
Yes
167
074
014A
Pulse Train Frequency
Reference Gain
0 % to 255 %
1%
100 %
Yes
-
075
014B
Pulse Train Frequency
Reference Bias
-100 % to 100
%
1%
0%
Yes
-
076
014C
Pulse Train Frequency Filter
Time Constant
0.00 to 2.00 s
0.01 s
0.10 s
Yes
-
077
014D
Multi-function Analog Input
Function
0 to 4
-
0
No
121
078
014E
Multi-function Analog Input
Signal Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
120
079
014F
Frequency Reference Bias
(FBIAS) Value
0 % to 50 %
1%
10 %
No
120
Third Functions (Constants n080 to n119)
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
1 to 4, 7 to 9,
12
-
(Note 4)
No
94
0 to 2
(Note 9)
-
0
No
79
080
0150
Carrier Frequency Selection
081
0151
Momentary Power Loss Ridethrough Method
082
0152
Automatic Retry Attempts
0 to 10 times
-
0
No
84
083
0153
Jump Frequency 1
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
No
84
084
0154
Jump Frequency 2
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
No
84
238
9 Specifications
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
085
0155
Jump Frequency 3
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
No
84
086
0156
Jump Frequency Range
0.00 to 25.50
Hz
0.01 Hz
0.00 Hz
No
84
087
0157
Cumulative Operation Time
Function Selection (Note 8)
0, 1
-
0
No
-
088
0158
Cumulative Operation Time
0 to 6550
1 = 10H
0H
No
-
(Note 8)
089
0159
DC Injection Braking Current
0 to 100 %
1%
50%
No
89
090
015A
DC Injection Braking Time at
Stop
0.0 to 25.5 s
0.1 s
0.5 s
No
107
091
015B
DC Injection Braking Time at
Startup
0.0 to 25.5 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
No
89
092
015C
Stall Prevention during
Deceleration
0, 1
-
0
No
134
093
015D
Stall Prevention Level during
Acceleration
30% to 200%
1%
170%
No
131
094
015E
Stall Prevention Level during
Running
30% to 200%
1%
160%
No
134
095
015F
Frequency Detection Level
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
No
82
096
0160
Overtorque Detection
Function Selection 1
0 to 4
-
0
No
81
097
0161
Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function Selection 2
0, 1
-
0
No
82
098
0162
Overtorque Detection Level
30% to 200%
1%
160%
No
82
099
0163
Overtorque Detection Time
0.1 to 10.0 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
No
82
100
0164
Hold Output Frequency
Saving Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
114
101
0165
Speed Search Deceleration
Time
0.1 to 10.0 s
0.1 s
2.0 s
No
89
102
0166
Speed Search Operation
Level
0 % to 200 %
1%
150 %
No
89
103
0167
Torque Compensation Gain
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
1.0
Yes
58
239
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
104
0168
Torque Compensation Time
Constant
0.0 to 25.5 s
105
0169
Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
0.0 to 6550
106
016A
Motor Rated Slip
0.0 to 20.0 Hz
107
016B
Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance
108
016C
Motor Leakage Inductance
109
016D
Torque Compensation
Voltage Limiter
0% to 250%
1%
150%
110
016E
Motor No-load Current
0% to 99%
1%
(Note 3)
No
59
111
016F
Slip Compensation Gain
0.0 to 2.5
0.1
0.0
(Note 6)
Yes
135
112
0170
Slip Compensation Time
Constant
0.0 to 25.5 s
0.1 s
2.0 s
(Note 6)
No
135
113
0171
Slip Compensation during
Regenerative Operation
0, 1
-
0
No
-
114
0172
Number of Transmission Cycle Error Detection (For SI-T/
V7)
2 to 10
-
2
No
191
115
0173
Stall Prevention above Base
Speed during Run
0, 1
-
0
No
133
116
0174
Acceleration/Deceleration
Time during Stall Prevention
0, 1
-
0
No
133
117
0175
Undertorque Detection
Function Selection 1
0 to 4
-
0
No
186
118
0176
Undertorque Detection Level
0% to 200%
1%
10%
No
186
119
0177
Undertorque Detection Time
0.1 to 10.0 s
0.1 s
0.1 s
No
186
240
0.3 s
(Note 6)
No
58
0.01 W (less (Note 3)
than 1000
W)/1 W
(1000 W or
more)
No
58
(Note 3)
Yes
60
0.000 to 65.50
0.001 Ω
(Note 3)
Ω
(less than 10
Ω)/0.01 Ω
(10 Ω or
more)
No
60
No
61
No
-
0.00 to
655.0 mH
0.1 s
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
0.1 Hz
0.01 mH
(Note 3)
(less than
100 mH)/0.1
mH (100 mH
or more)
9 Specifications
Fourth Functions (Constants n120 to n179)
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
120
0178
Frequency Reference 9
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
121
0179
Frequency Reference 10
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
122
017A
Frequency Reference 11
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
123
017B
Frequency Reference 12
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
124
017C
Frequency Reference 13
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
125
017D
Frequency Reference 14
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
126
017E
Frequency Reference 15
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
127
017F
Frequency Reference 16
0.00 to 400.0
Hz
0.01 Hz
(less than
100 Hz)/0.1
Hz (100 Hz
or more)
0.00 Hz
Yes
74
128
0180
PID Control Selection
129
0181
PID Feedback Gain
130
0182
Proportional Gain (P)
0.0 to 25.0
131
0183
Integral Time (I)
0.0 to 360.0 s
132
0184
Derivative Time (D)
0.00 to 2.50 s
0.01 s
0 to 8
-
0
No
159
0.00 to 10.00
Hz
0.01
1.00
Yes
162
0.1
1.0
Yes
161
0.1 s
1.0 s
Yes
161
0.00
Yes
161
241
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
133
0185
PID Offset Adjustment
134
0186
Upper Limit of Integral Values
135
0187
Primary Delay Time Constant
for PID Output
136
0188
Selection of PID Feedback
Loss Detection
137
0189
138
018A
Setting Range Setting Unit
−100% to
100%
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
1%
0%
Yes
162
0% to 100%
1%
100%
Yes
161
0.0 to 10.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
Yes
162
0 to 2
-
0
No
163
PID Feedback Loss Detection
Level
0% to 100%
1%
0%
No
163
PID Feedback Loss Detection
Time
0.0 to 25.5 s
0.1 s
1.0 s
No
163
139
018B
Autotuning Selection
0 to 2
-
0
No
66
140
018C
Motor 2 Maximum Output Frequency
50.0 to
400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
50.0 Hz
No
99
141
018D
PTC Thermistor Input Motor
Overheat Protection Selection
0 to 7
-
0
No
139
142
018E
Motor Temperature Input Filter
Time Constant
0.0 to 10.0 s
0.1 s
0.2 s
Yes
139
143
018F
Sequence Input Redundant
Reading Selection (Stop Position Control Selection)
0 to 2
-
0
No
108
144
0190
Stop Position Control Compensation Gain
0.50 to 2.55
0.1
1.00
No
108
145
0191
Bi-directional Function Selection
0, 1
-
0
No
163
146
0192
Frequency Offset Selection
0 to 29
-
0
No
85
147
0193
Motor 2 Maximum Voltage
Output Frequency
0.2 to
400.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
50.0 Hz
No
99
148
0194
UV fault storage selection
0,1
-
0
No
-
149
0195
Pulse Train Input Scaling
100 to 3300
1 = 10 Hz
2500
(25 kHz)
No
128
150
0196
Pulse Monitor Output
Frequency Selection
0, 1, 6, 12, 24,
36, 40 to 45,
50
-
0
No
92
151
0197
MEMOBUS Timeover
Detection
0 to 4
-
0
No
143
152
0198
MEMOBUS Frequency
Reference and Frequency
Monitor Unit
0 to 3
-
0
No
143
242
9 Specifications
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
153
0199
MEMOBUS Slave Address
0 to 32
-
0
No
144
154
019A
MEMOBUS BPS Selection
0 to 3
-
2
No
144
155
019B
MEMOBUS Parity Selection
0 to 2
-
0
No
144
156
019C
Transmission Waiting Time
10 to 65 ms
1 ms
10 ms
No
144
157
019D
RTS Control
0, 1
-
0
No
144
158
019E
Motor 2 Maximum Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
200.0 V
(Note 2)
No
99
159
019F
Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 to 255.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
12.0 V
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
No
99
160
01A0
Motor 2 Minimum Output
Frequency Voltage
0.1 to 50.0 V
(Note 2)
0.1 V
12.0 V
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
No
99
161
01A1
Motor 2 Rated Current
0% to 150% of
Inverter rated
current
0.1 A
(Note 3)
No
99
162
0192
Motor 2 Rated Slip
0.0 to 20.0 Hz
0.1 Hz
(Note 3)
No
99
163
01A3
PID Output Gain
0.0 to 25.0
0.1
1.0
No
162
164
01A4
PID Feedback Value Selection
0 to 5
-
0
No
160
165
01A5
Externally Mounting Type
Braking Resistor Overheat
Protection Selection (Note 7)
0, 1
-
0
No
-
166
01A6
Input Open-phase Detection
Level
0% to 100%
1%
0%
No
184
167
01A7
Input Open-phase Detection
Time
0 to 255 s
1s
0s
No
184
168
01A8
Output Open-phase Detection
Level
0% to 100%
1%
0%
No
184
169
01A9
Output Open-phase Detection
Time
0.0 to 2.0 s
0.1 s
0.0 s
No
184
170
01AA
Enter Command Operation
Selection (MEMOBUS
communications)
0, 1
-
0
No
155
171
01AB
Frequency Reference Bias
Upper Limit (Up/Down Command 2)
0.0% to
100.0%
(n011 = 100%)
0.1%
0.0%
Yes
115
172
01AC
Frequency Reference Bias
Lower Limit (Up/Down Command 2)
-99.9% to
0.0%
(n011 = 100%)
0.1%
0.0%
Yes
115
243
No. Register
No. for
Transmission
Name
Setting Range Setting Unit
Factory Change User Ref.
Setting during Set- Page
Opera- ting
tion
173
01AD
DC Injection Braking
Proportional Gain
1 to 999
1 = 0.001
83
(0.083)
No
-
174
01AE
DC Injection Braking Integral
Time Constant
1 to 250
1 = 4 ms
25 (100
ms)
No
-
175
01AF
Reducing Carrier Frequency
Selection at Low Speed
0, 1
-
0
(Note 8)
No
97
176
01B0
Constant Copy Function
Selection
rdy, rEd, CPy,
vFy, vA, Sno
-
rdy
No
168
177
01B1
Constant Read Selection
Prohibit
0, 1
-
0
No
169
178
01B2
Fault History
Stores, displays most
recent 4
alarms
Setting
disabled
-
No
49
179
01B3
Software Version No.
Displays
lower-place 4
digits of software No.
Setting
disabled
-
No
-
Note: 1. Not initialized by constant initialization.
2. Upper limit of setting range and factory setting are doubled for 400 V
Class.
3. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to the next page.
4. Depends on Inverter capacity. Refer to page 96.
5. Factory setting of the model with JVOP-140 Digital Operator (with
potentiometer) is 0. Setting can be set to 1 by constant initialization.
6. When control mode selection (n002) is changed, factory setting corresponds to the control mode. Refer to the next page.
7. Constant that is provided for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V
and 400 V Classes.
8. 1 (Enabled) for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V and 400 V
Classes.
9. Do not select 3 to 100 as they are reserved for future use.
244
9 Specifications
No.
Name
V/f Control
Mode
(n002 = 0)
n014
Mid. Output Frequency
n015
Mid. Output Frequency Voltage
n016
Min. Output Frequency
n017
Min. Output Frequency Voltage
n104
Torque Compensation Time Constant
n111
Slip Compensation Gain
n112
Slip Compensation Gain Time Constant
Vector Control Mode
(n002 = 1)
1.3 Hz
3.0 Hz
12.0 V*1 *2
11.0 V*1
1.3 Hz
1.0 Hz
12.0 V*1 *2
4.3 V*1
0.3 s
0.2 s
0.0
1.0
2.0 s
0.2 s
* 1. Values are doubled for 400 V Class.
* 2. 10.0 V for 5.5 kW and 7.5 kW Inverters of 200 V Class and 20.0 V of
400 V Class.
Factory Settings That Change with the Inverter Capacity
• 200 V Class 3-phase
No.
-
Name
Inverter Capacity
Unit
kW
Factory Setting
0.1
kW
0.25
kW
0.55
kW
1.1
kW
1.5
kW
2.2
kW
4.0
kW
5.5
kW
7.5
kW
n036 Motor Rated Current
A
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.3
6.2
8.5
14.1
19.6
26.6
n105 Torque Compensation
Iron Loss
W
1.7
3.4
4.2
6.5
11.1
11.8
19
28.8
43.9
n106 Motor Rated Slip
Hz
2.5
2.6
2.9
2.5
2.6
2.9
3.3
1.5
1.3
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω
n108 Motor Leakage
Inductance
17.99 10.28 4.573 2.575 1.233 0.8 0.385 0.199 0.111
mH 110.4 56.08 42.21 19.07 13.4 9.81 6.34
45
35
32
4.22
2.65
n110 Motor No-load Current
%
72
73
62
55
26
30
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0 12.0 12.0
10.0
10.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0 12.0 12.0
10.0
10.0
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
245
• 200 V Class Single-phase
No.
-
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
Factory Setting
kW 0.1 kW 0.25 kW 0.55 kW 1.1 kW 1.5 kW 2.2 kW 4.0 kW
n036 Motor Rated Current
A
0.6
1.1
1.9
3.3
6.2
8.5
14.1
n105 Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
W
1.7
3.4
4.2
6.5
11.1
11.8
19
n106 Motor Rated Slip
Hz
2.5
2.6
2.9
2.5
2.6
2.9
3.3
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω
17.99
10.28
4.573
2.575
1.233
0.8
0.385
6.34
n108 Motor Leakage Inductance
mH
110.4
56.08
42.21
19.07
13.4
9.81
n110 Motor No-load Current
%
72
73
62
55
45
35
32
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
12.0
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
• 400 V Class 3-phase
No.
Name
Unit
Inverter Capacity
kW
0.37
kW
0.55
kW
1.1
kW
n036 Motor Rated Current
A
0.6
1.0
1.6
3.1
4.2
n105 Torque Compensation Iron
Loss
W
3.4
4.0
6.1
11.0
11.7
n106 Motor Rated Slip
Hz
2.5
2.7
2.6
2.5
3.0
3.2
3.2
n107 Motor Line-to-neutral
Resistance *
Ω
-
Factory Setting
1.5
kW
2.2
kW
3.0
kW
4.0
kW
5.5
kW
7.5
kW
7.0
7.0
9.8
13.3
19.3
19.3 28.8 43.9
1.5
1.3
41.97 19.08 11.22 5.044 3.244 1.514 1.514 0.797 0.443
n108 Motor Leakage Inductance mH 224.3 168.8 80.76 53.25 40.03 24.84 24.84 16.87 10.59
n110 Motor No-load Current
%
73
n159 Motor 2 Mid. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
24.0
24.0 24.0 24.0
63
52
45
24.0 24.0
35
24.0 20.0 20.0
n160 Motor 2 Min. Output
Frequency Voltage
V
24.0
24.0 24.0 24.0
24.0 24.0
24.0 20.0 20.0
* Sets the value of the motor resistance for one phase.
246
33
33
26
30
10 Conformance to CE Markings
10 Conformance to CE Markings
Points regarding conformance to CE markings are given below.
„ CE Markings
CE markings indicate conformance to safety and environmental standards that apply to business transactions (including production, imports,
and sales) in Europe. There are unified European standards for mechanical products (Machine Directive), electrical products (Low Voltage
Directive), and electrical noise (EMC Directive). CE markings are
required for business transactions in Europe (including production,
imports, and sales).
The V7AZ Series Inverters bear CE markings indicating conformance
to the Low Voltage Directive and the EMC Directive.
• Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC
93/68/EEC
• EMC Directive: 89/336/EEC
92/31/EEC
93/68/EEC
Machinery and installations that incorporate the Inverter are also subject
to CE markings. It is ultimately the responsibility of customers making
products incorporating the Inverter to attach CE markings to the finished products. The customer must confirm that the finished products
(machines or installations) conform to the European Standards.
„ Requirements for Conformance to CE Markings
† Low Voltage Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the Low Voltage Directive under the conditions described in European Standard
EN50178.
Requirements for Conformance to the Low Voltage Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters must satisfy the following conditions in order to
conform to the Low Voltage Directive.
• Only basic insulation to meet the requirements of protection class 1
and overvoltage category II is provided with control circuit terminals.
Additional insulation may be necessary in the end product to conform
to CE requirements.
247
• For 400 V Class Inverters, always ground the supply neutral to conform to CE requirements.
† EMC Directive
V7AZ Series Inverters satisfy testing for conformance to the EMC
Directive under the conditions described in European Standard
EN61800-3.
Installation Method
In order to ensure that the machinery or installation incorporating the
Inverter conforms to the EMC Directive, perform installation according
to the method below.
• Install a noise filter that conforms to European Standards on the input
side. (Refer to EMC Noise Filter on page 251.)
• Use a shielded line or metal piping for wiring between the Inverter
and Motor. Make the wiring as short as possible.
• For details of installation method, refer to Installation Manual (document No. EZZ006543.)
248
10 Conformance to CE Markings
Installation and Wiring of Inverter and Noise Filter
(Model: CIMR-V7††20P1 to 27P5),
(Model: CIMR-V7††40P1 to 45P5)
L1 L2 L3 PE
Control Panel
Metal Mounting
Plate
3-phase Noise Filter
L1
L2
L3
Grounding
Face
E
Inverter
RST
UVW
E
Shielded
Cable
Grounding
Face
Motor cable: 20 m max.
IM
249
Installation and Wiring of Inverter and Noise Filter
(Model: CIMR-V7††B0P1 to B4P0)
L
N
PE
Control Panel
Metal Mounting
Plate
Single-phase Noise Filter
Grounding
Face
L
N
Inverter
R
S
U VW
E
Shielded
Cable
Grounding
Face
Motor cable: 20 m max.
IM
250
10 Conformance to CE Markings
EMC Noise Filter
Voltage
Class
Inverter
Model
CIMRV7AZ
200 V
B0P1
Noise Filter (Manufacturer: RASMI)
Model No.
Number of
Phases
Rated
Current
(A)
Mass
(kg)
Dimensions
W×L×H
Y×X
φd
3G3MVPFI1010
1
10
0.6
71 × 169 × 45
51 × 156
5.0
3G3MVPFI1020
1
20
1.0
111 × 169 × 50
91 × 156
5.0
B2P2
3G3MVPFI1030
1
30
1.1
144 × 174 × 50
120 × 161
5.0
B3P7
3G3MVPFI1040
1
40
1.2
174 × 174 ×50
150 × 161
5.0
3G3MVPFI2010
3
10
0.8
82 × 194 × 50
62 × 181
5.0
3G3MVPFI2020
3
16
1.0
111 × 169 × 50
91 × 156
5.0
3G3MVPFI2030
3
26
1.1
144 × 174 × 50
120 × 161
5.0
3G3MVPFI2050
3
50
2.3
184 × 304 × 56
150 × 264
6.0
3G3MVPFI3005
3
5
1.0
111 × 169 × 45
91 × 156
5.0
3G3MVPFI3010
3
10
1.0
111 × 169 × 45
91 × 156
5.0
3G3MVPFI3020
3
15
1.1
144 × 174 × 50
120 × 161
5.0
3G3MVPFI3030
3
30
2.3
184 × 304 × 56
150 × 264
6.0
B0P2
B0P4
B0P7
B1P5
B4P0
20P1
20P2
20P4
20P7
21P5
22P2
23P7
24P0
25P5
27P5
400 V
40P2
40P4
40P7
41P5
42P2
43P0
43P7
44P0
45P5
47P5
251
The EMC-compliant V7 Series noise filter is footprint type.
φd
CIMR-V7††
A to Z: Specifications
XL
A to Z: Type
H
252
Y
W
Revision History
The revision dates and numbers of the revised manuals are given on the
bottom of the back cover.
MANUAL NO. TOEP C710606 05A
C Printed in Japan March 2005 05-03
Date of
printing
Date of
Printing
March 2005
Rev.
No.
-
Section
Date of original
publication
Revised Content
First edition